blob: bdee1cc19c7e179b2917fbea83588ff781cb84c5 [file] [log] [blame]
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001/*
Johannes Berg3017b802007-08-28 17:01:53 -04002 * mac80211 <-> driver interface
3 *
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
5 * Copyright 2006-2007 Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +02006 * Copyright 2007-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
Johannes Bergd98ad832014-09-03 15:24:57 +03007 * Copyright 2013-2014 Intel Mobile Communications GmbH
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03008 * Copyright (C) 2015 Intel Deutschland GmbH
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07009 *
10 * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
11 * it under the terms of the GNU General Public License version 2 as
12 * published by the Free Software Foundation.
13 */
14
15#ifndef MAC80211_H
16#define MAC80211_H
17
Paul Gortmaker187f1882011-11-23 20:12:59 -050018#include <linux/bug.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070019#include <linux/kernel.h>
20#include <linux/if_ether.h>
21#include <linux/skbuff.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070022#include <linux/ieee80211.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070023#include <net/cfg80211.h>
Johannes Berg42d98792011-07-07 18:58:01 +020024#include <asm/unaligned.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070025
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040026/**
27 * DOC: Introduction
28 *
29 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
30 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
31 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
32 * drivers.
33 */
34
35/**
36 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
37 *
38 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070039 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
40 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
41 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +010042 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
43 * tasklet function.
44 *
45 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -070046 * use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070047 */
48
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040049/**
50 * DOC: Warning
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070051 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040052 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
53 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
54 */
55
56/**
57 * DOC: Frame format
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070058 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040059 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
60 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
61 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
62 * hardware.
63 *
64 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
65 *
66 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
67 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
68 *
69 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
70 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070071 */
72
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +020073/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -040074 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
75 *
76 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
77 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
78 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
79 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
80 *
81 * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
82 * suspend.
83 *
84 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
85 *
86 */
87
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +010088/**
89 * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing
90 *
91 * mac80211 provides an optional intermediate queueing implementation designed
92 * to allow the driver to keep hardware queues short and provide some fairness
93 * between different stations/interfaces.
94 * In this model, the driver pulls data frames from the mac80211 queue instead
95 * of letting mac80211 push them via drv_tx().
96 * Other frames (e.g. control or management) are still pushed using drv_tx().
97 *
98 * Drivers indicate that they use this model by implementing the .wake_tx_queue
99 * driver operation.
100 *
101 * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with a
102 * single per-vif queue for multicast data frames.
103 *
104 * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations
105 * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops.
106 *
107 * The driver can't access the queue directly. To dequeue a frame, it calls
108 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a queue, it
109 * calls the .wake_tx_queue driver op.
110 *
111 * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has
112 * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling
113 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq
114 * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls
115 * .release_buffered_frames().
116 * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own
117 * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained
118 * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue).
119 */
120
Paul Gortmaker313162d2012-01-30 11:46:54 -0500121struct device;
122
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -0400123/**
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200124 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
125 *
126 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +0100127 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200128 */
129enum ieee80211_max_queues {
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200130 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES = 16,
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +0100131 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP = BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200132};
133
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200134#define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 0xff
135
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200136/**
Johannes Berg4bce22b2010-11-16 11:49:58 -0800137 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
138 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
139 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
140 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
141 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
142 */
143enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
144 IEEE80211_AC_VO = 0,
145 IEEE80211_AC_VI = 1,
146 IEEE80211_AC_BE = 2,
147 IEEE80211_AC_BK = 3,
148};
Johannes Berg948d8872011-09-29 16:04:29 +0200149#define IEEE80211_NUM_ACS 4
Johannes Berg4bce22b2010-11-16 11:49:58 -0800150
151/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400152 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
153 *
154 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100155 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400156 *
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -0400157 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200158 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
159 * 2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400160 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100161 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300162 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +0200163 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400164 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700165struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200166 u16 txop;
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100167 u16 cw_min;
168 u16 cw_max;
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200169 u8 aifs;
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300170 bool acm;
Kalle Valoab133152010-01-12 10:42:31 +0200171 bool uapsd;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700172};
173
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700174struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
175 unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
176 unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
177 unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
178 unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
179};
180
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100181/**
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200182 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100183 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200184 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100185 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200186 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
187 * this is used only with channel switching with CSA
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200188 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200189 */
190enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100191 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH = BIT(0),
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200192 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS = BIT(1),
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100193 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR = BIT(2),
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200194 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(3),
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200195 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH = BIT(4),
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200196};
197
198/**
199 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
200 *
201 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
202 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
203 *
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100204 * @def: the channel definition
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200205 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200206 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
207 * active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
208 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
209 * after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
Simon Wunderlich5d7fad42012-11-30 19:17:28 +0100210 * this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100211 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200212 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
213 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
214 */
215struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100216 struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200217 struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200218
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200219 u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
220
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100221 bool radar_enabled;
222
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +0100223 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200224};
225
226/**
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +0300227 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode
228 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already
229 * exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface
230 * needs to be switched from one to the other.
231 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop
232 * to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but
233 * will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches
234 * from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course
235 * implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing
236 * hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context
237 * will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used
238 * for changes/removal.)
239 */
240enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode {
241 CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF,
242 CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS,
243};
244
245/**
246 * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information
247 *
248 * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that
249 * needs to switch from one chanctx to another. The
250 * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be
251 * done.
252 *
253 * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx
254 * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned
255 * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned
256 */
257struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch {
258 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
259 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx;
260 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx;
261};
262
263/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100264 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
265 *
266 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback
267 * to indicate which BSS parameter changed.
268 *
269 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
270 * also implies a change in the AID.
271 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
272 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300273 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
Tomas Winkler38668c02008-03-28 16:33:32 -0700274 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200275 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200276 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200277 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
278 * reason (IBSS and managed mode)
279 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
280 * new beacon (beaconing modes)
281 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
282 * enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200283 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200284 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300285 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200286 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
287 * that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200288 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200289 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200290 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300291 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200292 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100293 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
294 * changed (currently only in P2P client mode, GO mode will be later)
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300295 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
296 * currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100297 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
298 * note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
299 * context had been assigned.
Rostislav Lisovy239281f2014-11-03 10:33:19 +0100300 * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200301 * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100302 */
303enum ieee80211_bss_change {
304 BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC = 1<<0,
305 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT = 1<<1,
306 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE = 1<<2,
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300307 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT = 1<<3,
Alexander Simona7ce1c92011-09-18 00:16:45 +0200308 BSS_CHANGED_HT = 1<<4,
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200309 BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES = 1<<5,
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200310 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT = 1<<6,
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200311 BSS_CHANGED_BSSID = 1<<7,
312 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON = 1<<8,
313 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED = 1<<9,
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200314 BSS_CHANGED_CQM = 1<<10,
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200315 BSS_CHANGED_IBSS = 1<<11,
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300316 BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER = 1<<12,
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200317 BSS_CHANGED_QOS = 1<<13,
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200318 BSS_CHANGED_IDLE = 1<<14,
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300319 BSS_CHANGED_SSID = 1<<15,
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200320 BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP = 1<<16,
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300321 BSS_CHANGED_PS = 1<<17,
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200322 BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER = 1<<18,
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100323 BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS = 1<<19,
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300324 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO = 1<<20,
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100325 BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH = 1<<21,
Rostislav Lisovy239281f2014-11-03 10:33:19 +0100326 BSS_CHANGED_OCB = 1<<22,
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200327 BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS = 1<<23,
Johannes Bergac8dd502010-05-05 09:44:02 +0200328
329 /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100330};
331
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300332/*
333 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
334 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
335 * filtering will be disabled.
336 */
337#define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
338
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100339/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200340 * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver
341 * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver.
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200342 * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300343 * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300344 * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because
345 * they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only
346 * once each time the timeout triggers.
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -0700347 */
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200348enum ieee80211_event_type {
349 RSSI_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200350 MLME_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300351 BAR_RX_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300352 BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200353};
354
355/**
356 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT
357 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver.
358 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver.
359 */
360enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data {
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -0700361 RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
362 RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
363};
364
365/**
Jonathan Corbeta839e462015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200366 * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200367 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data
368 */
369struct ieee80211_rssi_event {
370 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data;
371};
372
373/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200374 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
375 * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication
Emmanuel Grumbachd0d1a122015-03-16 23:23:36 +0200376 * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association
Emmanuel Grumbacha90faa92015-03-16 23:23:37 +0200377 * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received..
378 * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent.
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200379 */
380enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data {
381 AUTH_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbachd0d1a122015-03-16 23:23:36 +0200382 ASSOC_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha90faa92015-03-16 23:23:37 +0200383 DEAUTH_RX_EVENT,
384 DEAUTH_TX_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200385};
386
387/**
388 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
389 * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully.
390 * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer.
391 * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out.
392 */
393enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status {
394 MLME_SUCCESS,
395 MLME_DENIED,
396 MLME_TIMEOUT,
397};
398
399/**
Jonathan Corbeta839e462015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200400 * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200401 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data
402 * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status
403 * @reason: the reason code if applicable
404 */
405struct ieee80211_mlme_event {
406 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data;
407 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status;
408 u16 reason;
409};
410
411/**
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300412 * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events
413 * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates
414 * @tid: the tid
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300415 * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT)
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300416 */
417struct ieee80211_ba_event {
418 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
419 u16 tid;
420 u16 ssn;
421};
422
423/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200424 * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver
Jonathan Corbeta839e462015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200425 * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type.
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200426 * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200427 * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300428 * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300429 * @u:union holding the fields above
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200430 */
431struct ieee80211_event {
432 enum ieee80211_event_type type;
433 union {
434 struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi;
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200435 struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme;
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300436 struct ieee80211_ba_event ba;
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200437 } u;
438};
439
440/**
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200441 * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data
442 *
443 * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO
444 *
445 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
446 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
447 */
448struct ieee80211_mu_group_data {
449 u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN];
450 u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN];
451};
452
453/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100454 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
455 *
456 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
457 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
458 *
459 * @assoc: association status
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200460 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS
461 * or not
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530462 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100463 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
464 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
Johannes Bergea1b2b452015-06-02 20:15:49 +0200465 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble
466 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP)
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +0100467 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +0200468 * valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300469 * with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200470 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100471 * as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
472 * HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
473 * only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
474 * association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200475 * %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200476 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
477 * the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200478 * (see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100479 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
480 * is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200481 * IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync
482 * by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently
483 * guaranteed only in certain callbacks.
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700484 * @beacon_int: beacon interval
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800485 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200486 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
487 * index into the rate table configured by the driver in
488 * the current band.
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300489 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
Felix Fietkaudd5b4cc2010-11-22 20:58:24 +0100490 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200491 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
492 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100493 * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
494 * configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200495 * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data
Johannes Berg074d46d2012-03-15 19:45:16 +0100496 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
Avri Altman22f66892015-08-18 16:52:07 +0300497 * This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel.
498 * Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must
499 * be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200500 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
Johannes Berge86abc62015-10-22 17:35:14 +0200501 * implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should
502 * cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in
503 * relation to the newly configured threshold.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200504 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300505 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
506 * may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
507 * The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
508 * to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100509 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
510 * may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
511 * array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200512 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200513 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
514 * hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
515 * your driver/device needs to do.
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300516 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
517 * offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200518 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300519 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
520 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200521 * @txpower: TX power in dBm
Lorenzo Bianconidb82d8a2015-01-14 12:55:08 +0100522 * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit
523 * Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular
524 * TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is
525 * NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from
526 * userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to
527 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace)
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100528 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100529 */
530struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200531 const u8 *bssid;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100532 /* association related data */
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200533 bool assoc, ibss_joined;
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530534 bool ibss_creator;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100535 u16 aid;
536 /* erp related data */
537 bool use_cts_prot;
538 bool use_short_preamble;
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300539 bool use_short_slot;
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200540 bool enable_beacon;
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800541 u8 dtim_period;
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700542 u16 beacon_int;
543 u16 assoc_capability;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200544 u64 sync_tsf;
545 u32 sync_device_ts;
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100546 u8 sync_dtim_count;
Johannes Berg881d9482009-01-21 15:13:48 +0100547 u32 basic_rates;
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300548 struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
Felix Fietkaudd5b4cc2010-11-22 20:58:24 +0100549 int mcast_rate[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
Johannes Berg9ed6bcc2009-05-08 20:47:39 +0200550 u16 ht_operation_mode;
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200551 s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
552 u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100553 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200554 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group;
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300555 __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100556 int arp_addr_cnt;
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200557 bool qos;
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200558 bool idle;
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300559 bool ps;
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300560 u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
561 size_t ssid_len;
562 bool hidden_ssid;
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200563 int txpower;
Lorenzo Bianconidb82d8a2015-01-14 12:55:08 +0100564 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type;
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100565 struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100566};
567
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800568/**
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200569 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800570 *
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700571 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800572 *
Johannes Berg7351c6b2009-11-19 01:08:30 +0100573 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200574 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
575 * number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
576 * number and increasing the sequence number only when the
577 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
578 * assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
579 * for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
580 * that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
581 * If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
582 * assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
583 * 802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
584 * beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200585 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200586 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
587 * station
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200588 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200589 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
590 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200591 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200592 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
Johannes Bergab5b5342009-08-07 16:28:09 +0200593 * because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
594 * avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
595 * firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
596 * went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
597 * the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
598 * that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
599 * since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
600 * hardware queue.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200601 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
602 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
603 * is for the whole aggregation.
Ron Rindjunsky429a3802008-07-01 14:16:03 +0300604 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
605 * so consider using block ack request (BAR).
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200606 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
607 * set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
608 * be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600609 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
610 * that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
611 * off-channel operation.
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100612 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
613 * used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
614 * it can be sent out.
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200615 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
616 * used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200617 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
618 * used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100619 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
620 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
621 * be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200622 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
623 * transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
624 * by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
625 * queue gets full.
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100626 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
627 * after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
628 * be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100629 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
630 * code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
631 * should kick the MLME state machine.
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200632 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
633 * MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
634 * status to user space)
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400635 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200636 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
637 * frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
Johannes Berg610dbc92011-01-06 22:36:44 +0100638 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
639 * the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
640 * in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
641 * handled properly by the device.
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200642 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
643 * testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
644 * TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530645 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
646 * This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
647 * frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200648 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
649 * when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
650 * an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
Johannes Bergdeeaee12011-09-29 16:04:35 +0200651 * the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
652 * PS-Poll responses.
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530653 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
654 * This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
655 * the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200656 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
657 * would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
658 * monitor injection).
Sujith Manoharan5cf16612014-12-10 21:26:11 +0530659 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with
660 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without
661 * any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW).
662 * This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack
663 * behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK.
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200664 *
665 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
666 * forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800667 */
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200668enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200669 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS = BIT(0),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200670 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ = BIT(1),
671 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK = BIT(2),
672 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT = BIT(3),
673 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT = BIT(4),
674 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM = BIT(5),
675 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU = BIT(6),
676 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED = BIT(7),
677 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED = BIT(8),
678 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK = BIT(9),
679 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU = BIT(10),
680 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK = BIT(11),
681 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE = BIT(12),
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600682 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK = BIT(13),
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100683 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING = BIT(14),
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200684 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED = BIT(15),
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200685 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT = BIT(16),
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100686 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER = BIT(17),
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200687 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES = BIT(18),
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100688 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION = BIT(19),
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100689 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX = BIT(20),
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200690 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX = BIT(21),
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400691 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC = BIT(22),
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200692 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC = BIT(23) | BIT(24),
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +0100693 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN = BIT(25),
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200694 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE = BIT(26),
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530695 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE = BIT(27),
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200696 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP = BIT(28),
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530697 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE = BIT(29),
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200698 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG = BIT(30),
Sujith Manoharan5cf16612014-12-10 21:26:11 +0530699 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED = BIT(31),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200700};
701
Johannes Bergabe37c42010-06-07 11:12:27 +0200702#define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT 23
703
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200704/**
705 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
706 *
707 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
708 * protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
Sujith Manoharan6b127c72014-12-10 21:26:10 +0530709 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
710 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200711 *
712 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
713 */
714enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
715 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO = BIT(0),
Sujith Manoharan6b127c72014-12-10 21:26:10 +0530716 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE = BIT(1),
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200717};
718
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200719/*
720 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
721 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
722 */
723#define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK | \
724 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT | \
725 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU | \
726 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK | \
727 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK | \
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100728 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER | \
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200729 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC | \
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200730 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200731
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530732/**
733 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
734 * Rate Control algorithm.
735 *
736 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
737 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
738 *
739 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
740 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
741 * This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
742 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
743 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100744 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
745 * into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530746 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
747 * Greenfield mode.
748 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100749 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
750 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
751 * (80+80 isn't supported yet)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530752 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
753 * adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
754 * NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
755 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
756 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200757enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
758 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS = BIT(0),
759 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT = BIT(1),
760 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE = BIT(2),
761
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100762 /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200763 IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS = BIT(3),
764 IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD = BIT(4),
765 IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(5),
766 IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA = BIT(6),
767 IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100768 IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS = BIT(8),
769 IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(9),
770 IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(10),
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800771};
772
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200773
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200774/* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
775#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200776
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200777/* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
778#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
779
780/* maximum number of rate stages */
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200781#define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES 4
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200782
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200783/* maximum number of rate table entries */
784#define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE 4
785
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200786/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200787 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200788 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200789 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
790 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
Johannes Berge25cf4a2008-10-23 08:51:20 +0200791 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200792 *
793 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
794 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
795 *
796 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
797 * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200798 *
799 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
800 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
801 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
802 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
803 * information
804 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
805 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
806 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
807 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
808 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
809 * information should then contain
810 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
811 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
812 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200813 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200814struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
815 s8 idx;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100816 u16 count:5,
817 flags:11;
Gustavo F. Padovan3f30fc12010-07-21 10:59:58 +0000818} __packed;
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200819
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100820#define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY 31
821
822static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
823 u8 mcs, u8 nss)
824{
825 WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200826 WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
827 rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100828}
829
830static inline u8
831ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
832{
833 return rate->idx & 0xF;
834}
835
836static inline u8
837ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
838{
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200839 return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100840}
841
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200842/**
843 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200844 *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200845 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
846 * (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
847 * (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
848 * (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
849 *
850 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200851 * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races)
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200852 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100853 * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700854 * @control: union for control data
855 * @status: union for status data
856 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100857 * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700858 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100859 * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700860 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200861 * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200862 */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200863struct ieee80211_tx_info {
864 /* common information */
865 u32 flags;
866 u8 band;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200867
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200868 u8 hw_queue;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100869
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100870 u16 ack_frame_id;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100871
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200872 union {
873 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200874 union {
875 /* rate control */
876 struct {
877 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
878 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
879 s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200880 u8 use_rts:1;
881 u8 use_cts_prot:1;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200882 u8 short_preamble:1;
883 u8 skip_table:1;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200884 /* 2 bytes free */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200885 };
886 /* only needed before rate control */
887 unsigned long jiffies;
888 };
Johannes Berg25d834e2008-09-12 22:52:47 +0200889 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200890 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
891 struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200892 u32 flags;
893 /* 4 bytes free */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200894 } control;
895 struct {
Johannes Berg3b79af92015-06-01 23:14:59 +0200896 u64 cookie;
897 } ack;
898 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200899 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Eliad Pellera0f995a2014-03-13 14:30:47 +0200900 s32 ack_signal;
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200901 u8 ampdu_ack_len;
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100902 u8 ampdu_len;
Johannes Bergd748b462012-03-28 11:04:23 +0200903 u8 antenna;
Johannes Berg02219b32014-10-07 10:38:50 +0300904 u16 tx_time;
905 void *status_driver_data[19 / sizeof(void *)];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200906 } status;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200907 struct {
908 struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
909 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200910 u8 pad[4];
911
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200912 void *rate_driver_data[
913 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
914 };
915 void *driver_data[
916 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200917 };
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700918};
919
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +0300920/**
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +0200921 * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs
922 *
David Spinadel633e2712014-02-06 16:15:23 +0200923 * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan
924 * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace
925 * and the ones generated by mac80211.
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +0200926 *
927 * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs.
928 * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs.
929 * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones)
930 * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies
931 */
932struct ieee80211_scan_ies {
933 const u8 *ies[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
934 size_t len[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
935 const u8 *common_ies;
936 size_t common_ie_len;
937};
938
939
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200940static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
941{
942 return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
943}
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400944
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +0200945static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
946{
947 return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
948}
949
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200950/**
951 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
952 *
953 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
954 *
955 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
956 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
957 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
958 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
959 *
960 * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use
961 * info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data
962 * instead if you need only the less space that allows.
963 */
964static inline void
965ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
966{
967 int i;
968
969 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
970 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
971 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
972 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
973 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
974 /* clear the rate counts */
975 for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
976 info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
977
978 BUILD_BUG_ON(
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200979 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ack_signal) != 20);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200980 memset(&info->status.ampdu_ack_len, 0,
981 sizeof(struct ieee80211_tx_info) -
982 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ampdu_ack_len));
983}
984
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400985
986/**
987 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
988 *
989 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
990 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
991 * Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
992 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400993 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
994 * verification has been done by the hardware.
995 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV/ICV are stripped from this frame.
996 * If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
997 * hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
Johannes Berg981d94a2015-06-12 14:39:02 +0200998 * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this
999 * flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection.
1000 * Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame
1001 * is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set)
Johannes Berg72abd812007-09-17 01:29:22 -04001002 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
1003 * the frame.
1004 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
1005 * the frame.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001006 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
Johannes Berg6ebacbb2011-02-23 15:06:08 +01001007 * field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
1008 * was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
1009 * merging.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001010 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1011 * field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
1012 * (including FCS) was received.
Bruno Randolfb4f28bb2008-07-30 17:19:55 +02001013 * @RX_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +02001014 * @RX_FLAG_HT: HT MCS was used and rate_idx is MCS index
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +01001015 * @RX_FLAG_VHT: VHT MCS was used and rate_index is MCS index
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +02001016 * @RX_FLAG_40MHZ: HT40 (40 MHz) was used
1017 * @RX_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
Felix Fietkaufe8431f2012-03-01 18:00:07 +01001018 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
1019 * Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02001020 * @RX_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission, if
1021 * the driver fills this value it should add %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
1022 * to hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001023 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
1024 * number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
1025 * each A-MPDU
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001026 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
1027 * subframes of a single A-MPDU
1028 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
1029 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
1030 * on this subframe
1031 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
1032 * is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
Emmanuel Grumbach63c361f2014-02-05 12:48:53 +02001033 * @RX_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +02001034 * @RX_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
Simon Wunderlicha5e70692013-07-08 16:55:52 +02001035 * @RX_FLAG_10MHZ: 10 MHz (half channel) was used
1036 * @RX_FLAG_5MHZ: 5 MHz (quarter channel) was used
Michal Kazior0cfcefe2013-09-23 15:34:38 +02001037 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
1038 * subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
1039 * All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
1040 * if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
1041 * the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
1042 * deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
1043 * subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
1044 * either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
1045 * interleaved with other frames.
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +01001046 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific
1047 * radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by
1048 * the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001049 */
1050enum mac80211_rx_flags {
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001051 RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR = BIT(0),
1052 RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED = BIT(1),
1053 RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED = BIT(3),
1054 RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED = BIT(4),
1055 RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC = BIT(5),
1056 RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC = BIT(6),
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001057 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001058 RX_FLAG_SHORTPRE = BIT(8),
1059 RX_FLAG_HT = BIT(9),
1060 RX_FLAG_40MHZ = BIT(10),
1061 RX_FLAG_SHORT_GI = BIT(11),
1062 RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL = BIT(12),
1063 RX_FLAG_HT_GF = BIT(13),
1064 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS = BIT(14),
Johannes Berg981d94a2015-06-12 14:39:02 +02001065 RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED = BIT(15),
Sara Sharonf9cfa5f2015-12-08 16:04:33 +02001066 RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED = BIT(16),
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001067 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN = BIT(17),
1068 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST = BIT(18),
1069 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR = BIT(19),
1070 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN = BIT(20),
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001071 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END = BIT(21),
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +01001072 RX_FLAG_VHT = BIT(22),
Emmanuel Grumbach63c361f2014-02-05 12:48:53 +02001073 RX_FLAG_LDPC = BIT(23),
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +02001074 RX_FLAG_STBC_MASK = BIT(26) | BIT(27),
Simon Wunderlicha5e70692013-07-08 16:55:52 +02001075 RX_FLAG_10MHZ = BIT(28),
1076 RX_FLAG_5MHZ = BIT(29),
Michal Kazior0cfcefe2013-09-23 15:34:38 +02001077 RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE = BIT(30),
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +01001078 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA = BIT(31),
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001079};
1080
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +02001081#define RX_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT 26
1082
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001083/**
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001084 * enum mac80211_rx_vht_flags - receive VHT flags
1085 *
1086 * These flags are used with the @vht_flag member of
1087 * &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
1088 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_80MHZ: 80 MHz was used
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001089 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_160MHZ: 160 MHz was used
Emmanuel Grumbachfb378c22014-03-04 10:35:25 +02001090 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001091 */
1092enum mac80211_rx_vht_flags {
1093 RX_VHT_FLAG_80MHZ = BIT(0),
Johannes Bergf89903d2015-01-15 16:02:46 +01001094 RX_VHT_FLAG_160MHZ = BIT(1),
1095 RX_VHT_FLAG_BF = BIT(2),
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001096};
1097
1098/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001099 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
1100 *
1101 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
1102 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +02001103 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001104 *
Bruno Randolfc132bec2008-02-18 11:20:51 +09001105 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
1106 * (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +02001107 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
1108 * it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001109 * @band: the active band when this frame was received
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001110 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
Johannes Berg4352a4d2015-12-08 16:04:35 +02001111 * This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed
1112 * for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting.
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001113 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
1114 * unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
1115 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +02001116 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
1117 * values were filled.
1118 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
1119 * support dB or unspecified units)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001120 * @antenna: antenna used
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +02001121 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +01001122 * HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
1123 * @vht_nss: number of streams (VHT only)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001124 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_*
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001125 * @vht_flag: %RX_VHT_FLAG_*
Johannes Berg554891e2010-09-24 12:38:25 +02001126 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001127 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
1128 * each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
1129 * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001130 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001131struct ieee80211_rx_status {
1132 u64 mactime;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +02001133 u32 device_timestamp;
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001134 u32 ampdu_reference;
1135 u32 flag;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001136 u16 freq;
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001137 u8 vht_flag;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001138 u8 rate_idx;
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +01001139 u8 vht_nss;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001140 u8 rx_flags;
1141 u8 band;
1142 u8 antenna;
1143 s8 signal;
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +02001144 u8 chains;
1145 s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001146 u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001147};
1148
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001149/**
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +01001150 * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information
1151 * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace
1152 * (this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more
1153 * bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that)
1154 * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed
1155 * alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace
1156 * description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment)
1157 * Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1!
1158 * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI
1159 * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace
1160 * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done
1161 * then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the
1162 * @data field.
1163 * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that
1164 * the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd
1165 * length
1166 * @data: the actual vendor namespace data
1167 *
1168 * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before
1169 * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns
1170 * data.
1171 */
1172struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap {
1173 u32 present;
1174 u8 align;
1175 u8 oui[3];
1176 u8 subns;
1177 u8 pad;
1178 u16 len;
1179 u8 data[];
1180} __packed;
1181
1182/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001183 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
1184 *
1185 * Flags to define PHY configuration options
1186 *
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001187 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
1188 * to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
1189 * or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001190 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
1191 * This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
1192 * meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
1193 * transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
1194 * Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
1195 * driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
1196 * for more.
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001197 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
1198 * the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
1199 * may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
1200 * be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
1201 * it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +02001202 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
1203 * operating channel.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001204 */
1205enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001206 IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR = (1<<0),
Johannes Bergae5eb022008-10-14 16:58:37 +02001207 IEEE80211_CONF_PS = (1<<1),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001208 IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE = (1<<2),
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +02001209 IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL = (1<<3),
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001210};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001211
Johannes Berg7a5158e2008-10-08 10:59:33 +02001212
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001213/**
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001214 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
1215 *
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001216 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001217 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +02001218 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001219 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
Johannes Berg47979382009-01-07 10:13:27 +01001220 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001221 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001222 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001223 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +02001224 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1225 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001226 */
1227enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001228 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS = BIT(1),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001229 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001230 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR = BIT(3),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001231 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS = BIT(4),
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +02001232 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER = BIT(5),
1233 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(6),
1234 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001235 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE = BIT(8),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001236};
1237
1238/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001239 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
1240 *
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +02001241 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
1242 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
1243 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
1244 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
1245 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001246 */
1247enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1248 IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1249 IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
1250 IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1251 IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1252
1253 /* keep last */
1254 IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1255};
1256
1257/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001258 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1259 *
1260 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1261 *
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001262 * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1263 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001264 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001265 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1266 * in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1267 * has been received and the DTIM period is known.
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001268 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1269 * powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1270 * the CONF_PS flag is set.
1271 *
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +02001272 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1273 * value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001274 *
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001275 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001276 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001277 *
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001278 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001279 * (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1280 * but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001281 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001282 * frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1283 * number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001284 *
1285 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1286 * %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +02001287 * configured for an HT channel.
1288 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1289 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001290 */
1291struct ieee80211_conf {
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001292 u32 flags;
Juuso Oikarinenff616382010-06-09 09:51:52 +03001293 int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +02001294
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001295 u16 listen_interval;
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001296 u8 ps_dtim_period;
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001297
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001298 u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1299
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001300 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001301 bool radar_enabled;
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001302 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001303};
1304
1305/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001306 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1307 *
1308 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1309 * operation.
1310 *
1311 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1312 * Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1313 * announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1314 * the driver passed into mac80211.
Luciano Coelho2ba45382014-10-08 09:48:35 +03001315 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the
1316 * rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211.
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001317 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1318 * scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001319 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001320 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1321 */
1322struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1323 u64 timestamp;
Luciano Coelho2ba45382014-10-08 09:48:35 +03001324 u32 device_timestamp;
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001325 bool block_tx;
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001326 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001327 u8 count;
1328};
1329
1330/**
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001331 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1332 *
1333 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1334 * on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001335 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1336 * monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1337 * connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1338 * provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01001339 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this
1340 * interface. This flag should be set during interface addition,
1341 * but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is
1342 * only valid for managed/station mode interfaces.
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comb115b972015-10-27 08:38:40 +01001343 * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes
1344 * and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even
1345 * this is not pure P2P vif.
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001346 */
1347enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1348 IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER = BIT(0),
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001349 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI = BIT(1),
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01001350 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD = BIT(2),
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comb115b972015-10-27 08:38:40 +01001351 IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE = BIT(3),
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001352};
1353
1354/**
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001355 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1356 *
1357 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1358 * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1359 *
Johannes Berg51fb61e2007-12-19 01:31:27 +01001360 * @type: type of this virtual interface
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001361 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1362 * or the BSS we're associated to
Johannes Berg47846c92009-11-25 17:46:19 +01001363 * @addr: address of this interface
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001364 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1365 * interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
Michal Kazior59af6922014-04-09 15:10:59 +02001366 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is
1367 * write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
1368 * for read access.
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001369 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1370 * these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1371 * or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1372 * at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001373 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1374 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001375 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
1376 * when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
1377 * path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
1378 * be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
1379 * processed after it switches back to %NULL.
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001380 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001381 * interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001382 * monitor interface (if that is requested.)
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03001383 * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this
1384 * interface.
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001385 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1386 * sizeof(void *).
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001387 * @txq: the multicast data TX queue (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001388 */
1389struct ieee80211_vif {
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001390 enum nl80211_iftype type;
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001391 struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
Johannes Berg47846c92009-11-25 17:46:19 +01001392 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001393 bool p2p;
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02001394 bool csa_active;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001395
1396 u8 cab_queue;
1397 u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1398
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001399 struct ieee80211_txq *txq;
1400
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001401 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
1402
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001403 u32 driver_flags;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001404
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001405#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1406 struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1407#endif
1408
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03001409 unsigned int probe_req_reg;
1410
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001411 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001412 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001413};
1414
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001415static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1416{
1417#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001418 return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001419#endif
1420 return false;
1421}
1422
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001423/**
Johannes Bergad7e7182013-11-13 13:37:47 +01001424 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
1425 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
1426 *
1427 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1428 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
1429 *
1430 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1431 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1432 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1433 */
1434struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
1435
1436/**
Emmanuel Grumbachdc5a1ad2015-03-12 08:53:24 +02001437 * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif
1438 * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for
1439 *
1440 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1441 * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif.
1442 *
1443 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1444 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1445 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1446 */
1447struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
1448
1449/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001450 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
1451 *
1452 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
1453 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
1454 *
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001455 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
1456 * driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001457 * particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs
1458 * will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001459 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
1460 * the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
1461 * generation in software.
Ivo van Doornc6adbd22008-04-17 21:11:18 +02001462 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
1463 * that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001464 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02001465 * CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames
1466 * (MFP) to be done in software.
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001467 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comee701082012-05-09 08:11:20 +03001468 * if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001469 * itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001470 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does
1471 * not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or
1472 * MIC.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001473 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
1474 * management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
1475 * crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
1476 * properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
1477 * fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
1478 * RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
1479 * %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001480 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02001481 * driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001482 * only for managment frames (MFP).
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001483 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the
1484 * driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always
1485 * be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001486 */
1487enum ieee80211_key_flags {
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001488 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT = BIT(0),
1489 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV = BIT(1),
1490 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC = BIT(2),
1491 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE = BIT(3),
1492 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX = BIT(4),
1493 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE = BIT(5),
1494 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT = BIT(6),
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001495 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001496};
1497
1498/**
1499 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
1500 *
1501 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
1502 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
1503 *
1504 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
1505 * wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001506 * encrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001507 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
Johannes Bergdb388a52015-06-01 15:36:51 +02001508 * @tx_pn: PN used for TX on non-TKIP keys, may be used by the driver
1509 * as well if it needs to do software PN assignment by itself
1510 * (e.g. due to TSO)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001511 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
1512 * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
1513 * @keylen: key material length
Luis R. Rodriguezffd78912008-06-21 10:02:46 -04001514 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
1515 * data block:
1516 * - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
1517 * - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
1518 * - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01001519 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
1520 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001521 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001522struct ieee80211_key_conf {
Johannes Bergdb388a52015-06-01 15:36:51 +02001523 atomic64_t tx_pn;
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001524 u32 cipher;
Felix Fietkau76708de2008-10-05 18:02:48 +02001525 u8 icv_len;
1526 u8 iv_len;
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001527 u8 hw_key_idx;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001528 u8 flags;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001529 s8 keyidx;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001530 u8 keylen;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001531 u8 key[0];
1532};
1533
Johannes Berga31cf1c2015-04-20 18:21:58 +02001534#define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN 16
1535
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001536/**
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02001537 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
1538 *
1539 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
1540 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1541 * reverse order than in packet)
1542 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1543 * reverse order than in packet)
1544 * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1545 * reverse order than in packet)
1546 * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1547 * reverse order than in packet)
Johannes Berga31cf1c2015-04-20 18:21:58 +02001548 * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02001549 */
1550struct ieee80211_key_seq {
1551 union {
1552 struct {
1553 u32 iv32;
1554 u16 iv16;
1555 } tkip;
1556 struct {
1557 u8 pn[6];
1558 } ccmp;
1559 struct {
1560 u8 pn[6];
1561 } aes_cmac;
1562 struct {
1563 u8 pn[6];
1564 } aes_gmac;
1565 struct {
1566 u8 pn[6];
1567 } gcmp;
Johannes Berga31cf1c2015-04-20 18:21:58 +02001568 struct {
1569 u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN];
1570 u8 seq_len;
1571 } hw;
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02001572 };
1573};
1574
1575/**
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02001576 * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme
1577 *
1578 * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining
1579 * the secure packet crypto handling.
1580 *
1581 * @cipher: a cipher suite selector
1582 * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage
1583 * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher
1584 * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header
1585 * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header
1586 * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header
1587 * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits
1588 * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx
1589 * key_idx value calculation:
1590 * (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift
1591 * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes
1592 */
1593struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme {
1594 u32 cipher;
1595 u16 iftype;
1596 u8 hdr_len;
1597 u8 pn_len;
1598 u8 pn_off;
1599 u8 key_idx_off;
1600 u8 key_idx_mask;
1601 u8 key_idx_shift;
1602 u8 mic_len;
1603};
1604
1605/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001606 * enum set_key_cmd - key command
1607 *
1608 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
1609 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
1610 *
1611 * @SET_KEY: a key is set
1612 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
1613 */
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001614enum set_key_cmd {
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001615 SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001616};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001617
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001618/**
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01001619 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
1620 *
1621 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
1622 * this is a special state for add/remove transitions
1623 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
1624 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
1625 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
1626 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
1627 */
1628enum ieee80211_sta_state {
1629 /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
1630 IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
1631 IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
1632 IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
1633 IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
1634 IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
1635};
1636
1637/**
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001638 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
1639 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
1640 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
1641 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
1642 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
1643 * (including 80+80 MHz)
1644 *
1645 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
1646 * correctly, the values must be sorted.
1647 */
1648enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
1649 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
1650 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
1651 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
1652 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
1653};
1654
1655/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001656 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
1657 *
1658 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001659 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001660 * Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
1661 */
1662struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
1663 struct rcu_head rcu_head;
1664 struct {
1665 s8 idx;
1666 u8 count;
1667 u8 count_cts;
1668 u8 count_rts;
1669 u16 flags;
1670 } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
1671};
1672
1673/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001674 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
1675 *
1676 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
1677 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
1678 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
1679 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
1680 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01001681 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001682 *
1683 * @addr: MAC address
1684 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
Johannes Berg323ce792008-09-11 02:45:11 +02001685 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates (per band)
Johannes Berg55d942f2013-03-01 13:07:48 +01001686 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1687 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
Johannes Berg527871d2015-03-21 08:09:55 +01001688 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does,
1689 * otherwise always false)
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001690 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1691 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
Eliad Peller910868d2011-09-11 09:46:55 +03001692 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
1693 * if wme is supported.
1694 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001695 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001696 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
1697 * station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
1698 * notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
1699 * the station moves to associated state.
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001700 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001701 * @rates: rate control selection table
Arik Nemtsov0c4972c2014-05-01 10:17:27 +03001702 * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer
Arik Nemtsov8b941482014-10-22 12:32:48 +03001703 * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only
1704 * valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place.
Tamizh chelvam93f04902015-10-07 10:40:04 +05301705 * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001706 * @txq: per-TID data TX queues (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001707 */
1708struct ieee80211_sta {
Johannes Berg881d9482009-01-21 15:13:48 +01001709 u32 supp_rates[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001710 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
1711 u16 aid;
Johannes Bergd9fe60d2008-10-09 12:13:49 +02001712 struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
Mahesh Palivela818255e2012-10-10 11:33:04 +00001713 struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
Arik Nemtsov39df6002011-06-27 23:58:45 +03001714 bool wme;
Eliad Peller9533b4a2011-08-23 14:37:47 +03001715 u8 uapsd_queues;
1716 u8 max_sp;
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001717 u8 rx_nss;
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001718 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001719 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001720 struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
Arik Nemtsov0c4972c2014-05-01 10:17:27 +03001721 bool tdls;
Arik Nemtsov8b941482014-10-22 12:32:48 +03001722 bool tdls_initiator;
Tamizh chelvam93f04902015-10-07 10:40:04 +05301723 bool mfp;
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001724
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001725 struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS];
1726
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001727 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001728 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001729};
1730
1731/**
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001732 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
1733 *
1734 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
Sujith38a6cc72010-05-19 11:32:30 +05301735 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001736 *
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001737 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
1738 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
1739 */
Christian Lamparter89fad572008-12-09 16:28:06 +01001740enum sta_notify_cmd {
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001741 STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
1742};
1743
1744/**
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02001745 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
1746 *
1747 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
1748 * it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
1749 */
1750struct ieee80211_tx_control {
1751 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1752};
1753
1754/**
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001755 * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue
1756 *
1757 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
1758 * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue
1759 * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue)
1760 * @ac: the AC for this queue
Johannes Bergf8bdbb52015-05-20 15:04:53 +02001761 * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001762 *
1763 * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling
1764 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue().
1765 */
1766struct ieee80211_txq {
1767 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
1768 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1769 u8 tid;
1770 u8 ac;
1771
1772 /* must be last */
1773 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
1774};
1775
1776/**
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001777 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
1778 *
1779 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
1780 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
1781 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
1782 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
1783 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
1784 *
Johannes Bergaf65cd962009-11-17 18:18:36 +01001785 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
1786 * The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
1787 * controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
1788 * should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
1789 * will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
1790 * algorithm.
1791 * Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
1792 * callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
1793 * the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
1794 * @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
1795 * timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
1796 * CCK frames.
1797 *
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001798 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
1799 * Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
1800 * the FCS at the end.
1801 *
1802 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
1803 * Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
1804 * for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
1805 * rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
1806 * to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
1807 * multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07001808 * the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001809 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001810 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
1811 * Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
1812 * expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
1813 * If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
1814 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001815 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
1816 * Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
1817 * one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
1818 * between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
1819 *
Tomas Winkler06ff47b2008-06-18 17:53:44 +03001820 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
1821 * Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
1822 * Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
Sujith8b30b1f2008-10-24 09:55:27 +05301823 *
1824 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
1825 * Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
Kalle Valo520eb822008-12-18 23:35:27 +02001826 *
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001827 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
1828 * Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
1829 *
1830 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
1831 * Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
1832 * stack support for dynamic PS.
1833 *
1834 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
1835 * Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
Jouni Malinen4375d082009-01-08 13:32:11 +02001836 *
1837 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
1838 * Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02001839 *
Vivek Natarajan375177b2010-02-09 14:50:28 +05301840 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
1841 * Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
1842 * the stack.
1843 *
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02001844 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001845 * The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
1846 * periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02001847 *
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +02001848 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
1849 * This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
1850 * dtim_period).
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02001851 *
1852 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
1853 * per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
1854 * the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
1855 * to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
1856 * possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
1857 * only in that case.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02001858 *
1859 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
1860 * autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
1861 * this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
1862 * stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
1863 * Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
1864 * the PS mode of connected stations.
Arik Nemtsovedf6b782011-08-30 09:32:38 +03001865 *
1866 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
1867 * setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
1868 * software.
Eliad Peller885bd8e2012-02-02 17:44:55 +02001869 *
Johannes Berg4b6f1dd2012-04-03 14:35:57 +02001870 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
1871 * a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
1872 * active interfaces.
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001873 *
Ben Greeare27513f2014-10-22 12:23:03 -07001874 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to
1875 * be created. It is expected user-space will create vifs as
1876 * desired (and thus have them named as desired).
1877 *
Johannes Bergfa7e1fb2015-01-22 18:44:19 +01001878 * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the
1879 * crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically
1880 * try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if
1881 * the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its
1882 * supported cipher suites.
1883 *
Johannes Berg17c18bf2015-03-21 15:25:43 +01001884 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit,
1885 * this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration
1886 * for frames.
1887 *
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001888 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
1889 * queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
1890 * for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
1891 * control for more details.
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001892 *
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001893 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
1894 * selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
1895 *
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001896 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
1897 * P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
1898 * is supported.
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +01001899 *
1900 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
1901 * only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03001902 *
Johannes Berg919be622013-10-14 10:05:16 +02001903 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
1904 * and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
1905 * using aggregation for such frames.)
1906 *
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03001907 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
1908 * for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
1909 * is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
1910 * CSA frame.
Luciano Coelho5d52ee82014-02-27 14:33:47 +02001911 *
Ido Yarivc70f59a2014-07-29 15:39:14 +03001912 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload
1913 * or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first.
1914 *
Johannes Bergc526a462015-06-02 20:32:00 +02001915 * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02001916 * in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band.
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02001917 *
Arik Nemtsovb98fb442015-06-10 20:42:59 +03001918 * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth
1919 * than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel.
1920 *
Emmanuel Grumbach99e7ca42015-08-15 22:39:51 +03001921 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs
1922 * within A-MPDU.
1923 *
Helmut Schaa35afa582015-09-09 09:46:32 +02001924 * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status
1925 * for sent beacons.
1926 *
Johannes Berg31104892015-10-22 17:35:19 +02001927 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each
1928 * station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified
1929 * by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station
1930 * from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time.
1931 *
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02001932 * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001933 */
1934enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02001935 IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL,
1936 IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS,
1937 IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING,
1938 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC,
1939 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM,
1940 IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC,
1941 IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT,
1942 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION,
1943 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS,
1944 IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK,
1945 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS,
1946 IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE,
1947 IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF,
1948 IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF,
1949 IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL,
1950 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT,
1951 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS,
1952 IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR,
1953 IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL,
1954 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK,
1955 IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS,
1956 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW,
1957 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE,
1958 IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF,
1959 IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY,
1960 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES,
1961 IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA,
1962 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS,
1963 IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS,
Arik Nemtsovb98fb442015-06-10 20:42:59 +03001964 IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW,
Emmanuel Grumbach99e7ca42015-08-15 22:39:51 +03001965 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU,
Helmut Schaa35afa582015-09-09 09:46:32 +02001966 IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS,
Johannes Berg31104892015-10-22 17:35:19 +02001967 IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR,
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02001968
1969 /* keep last, obviously */
1970 NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001971};
1972
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001973/**
1974 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001975 *
1976 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
1977 * information for an 802.11 PHY.
1978 *
1979 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
1980 * 802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
1981 * members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001982 * and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
1983 * bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001984 *
1985 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
1986 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001987 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
1988 * along with this structure.
1989 *
1990 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
1991 *
1992 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
1993 * for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
1994 *
Felix Fietkau70dabeb2013-12-14 13:54:53 +01001995 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
1996 * Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001997 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001998 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001999 * only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002000 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002001 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02002002 * that HW supports
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002003 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002004 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +02002005 * data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
2006 * queues need to have configurable access parameters.
2007 *
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01002008 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
2009 * If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
2010 * set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01002011 *
2012 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2013 * within &struct ieee80211_vif.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002014 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2015 * within &struct ieee80211_sta.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02002016 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2017 * within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01002018 * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2019 * within @struct ieee80211_txq.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02002020 *
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02002021 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
2022 * can handle.
2023 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
2024 * the hw can report back.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002025 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04002026 *
Luciano Coelhodf6ba5d2011-01-12 15:26:30 +02002027 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
2028 * sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
2029 * aggregation.
2030 * This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
2031 * number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
2032 * it shouldn't be set.
Johannes Berg5dd36bc2011-01-18 13:52:23 +01002033 *
2034 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
Gregory Greenmanac062192015-11-17 10:24:38 +02002035 * aggregate an HT driver will transmit. Though ADDBA will advertise
2036 * a constant value of 64 as some older APs can crash if the window
2037 * size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N with FW v1.0.07
2038 * build 002 Jun 18 2012).
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002039 *
2040 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
2041 * (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02002042 *
2043 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
2044 * reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
2045 * include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_* values, only
2046 * adding _BW is supported today.
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03002047 *
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01002048 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
2049 * the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
2050 * Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_* values.
2051 *
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03002052 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
Johannes Berg680a0da2015-04-13 16:58:25 +02002053 * from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211,
2054 * other features will be rejected during HW registration.
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02002055 *
2056 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
2057 * for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
2058 * enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
2059 * Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
2060 * that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
2061 * neither enabled.
2062 *
2063 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
2064 * deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
2065 * Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02002066 *
2067 * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions.
2068 * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions
2069 * supported by HW.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01002070 *
2071 * @txq_ac_max_pending: maximum number of frames per AC pending in all txq
2072 * entries for a vif.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04002073 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002074struct ieee80211_hw {
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002075 struct ieee80211_conf conf;
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002076 struct wiphy *wiphy;
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01002077 const char *rate_control_algorithm;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002078 void *priv;
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002079 unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)];
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002080 unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
Felix Fietkau70dabeb2013-12-14 13:54:53 +01002081 unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01002082 int vif_data_size;
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002083 int sta_data_size;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02002084 int chanctx_data_size;
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01002085 int txq_data_size;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002086 u16 queues;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002087 u16 max_listen_interval;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002088 s8 max_signal;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002089 u8 max_rates;
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02002090 u8 max_report_rates;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002091 u8 max_rate_tries;
Luciano Coelhodf6ba5d2011-01-12 15:26:30 +02002092 u8 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
Johannes Berg5dd36bc2011-01-18 13:52:23 +01002093 u8 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002094 u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02002095 u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01002096 u16 radiotap_vht_details;
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03002097 netdev_features_t netdev_features;
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02002098 u8 uapsd_queues;
2099 u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02002100 u8 n_cipher_schemes;
2101 const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes;
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01002102 int txq_ac_max_pending;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002103};
2104
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002105static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2106 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2107{
2108 return test_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2109}
2110#define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2111
2112static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2113 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2114{
2115 return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2116}
2117#define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2118
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002119/**
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02002120 * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request
2121 *
2122 * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie)
2123 * @req: cfg80211 request.
2124 */
2125struct ieee80211_scan_request {
2126 struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies;
2127
2128 /* Keep last */
2129 struct cfg80211_scan_request req;
2130};
2131
2132/**
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02002133 * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters
2134 *
2135 * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from
2136 * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request
2137 * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode
2138 * @status: channel-switch response status
2139 * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received
2140 * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2141 * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2142 * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template
2143 * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb
2144 */
2145struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params {
2146 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2147 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef;
2148 u8 action_code;
2149 u32 status;
2150 u32 timestamp;
2151 u16 switch_time;
2152 u16 switch_timeout;
2153 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb;
2154 u32 ch_sw_tm_ie;
2155};
2156
2157/**
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08002158 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
2159 *
2160 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
2161 *
2162 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
2163 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
2164 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
2165 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
2166 * is already used internally by mac80211.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01002167 *
2168 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08002169 */
2170struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
2171
2172/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002173 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
2174 *
2175 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
2176 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
2177 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002178static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
2179{
2180 set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
2181}
2182
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002183/**
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002184 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002185 *
2186 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
2187 * @addr: the address to set
2188 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002189static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 *addr)
2190{
2191 memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
2192}
2193
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002194static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2195ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002196 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002197{
Larry Fingeraa331df2012-04-06 16:35:53 -05002198 if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002199 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002200 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002201}
2202
2203static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2204ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002205 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002206{
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002207 if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002208 return NULL;
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002209 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002210}
2211
2212static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2213ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02002214 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002215{
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002216 if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002217 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002218 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002219}
2220
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002221/**
Johannes Berg6096de72011-11-04 11:18:10 +01002222 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
2223 * @hw: the hardware
2224 * @skb: the skb
2225 *
2226 * Free a transmit skb. Use this funtion when some failure
2227 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
2228 */
2229void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
2230
2231/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002232 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002233 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002234 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
2235 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
2236 *
2237 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
2238 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01002239 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
2240 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
2241 * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002242 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
2243 * VLANs are configured for an access point.
2244 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002245 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
2246 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
2247 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
2248 *
2249 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
2250 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
2251 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
2252 * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
2253 *
Johannes Bergfa7e1fb2015-01-22 18:44:19 +01002254 * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is
2255 * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if
2256 * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the
2257 * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software.
2258 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002259 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
2260 *
2261 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
2262 * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
2263 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
2264 * based on the receive flags.
2265 *
2266 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
2267 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
2268 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
2269 * keys.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002270 *
2271 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
2272 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
2273 * handler.
2274 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
Lucas De Marchi25985ed2011-03-30 22:57:33 -03002275 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002276 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
2277 * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002278 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002279 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03002280 *
2281 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
2282 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
2283 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002284 */
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002285
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002286/**
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002287 * DOC: Powersave support
2288 *
2289 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
2290 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002291 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
2292 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
2293 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
2294 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
2295 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
2296 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
2297 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
2298 * it finds traffic directed to it.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002299 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002300 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
2301 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
2302 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04002303 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
2304 * back to sleep at appropriate times.
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002305 *
2306 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
2307 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
2308 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002309 *
2310 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
2311 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
2312 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
2313 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02002314 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
2315 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002316 * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002317 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002318 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
2319 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
2320 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
2321 * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
2322 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
2323 * periods.
2324 *
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04002325 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002326 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
2327 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
2328 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
2329 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
2330 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
2331 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
2332 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
2333 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
2334 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
2335 *
2336 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01002337 * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09002338 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002339 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
2340 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
2341 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
2342 *
2343 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
2344 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002345 */
2346
2347/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002348 * DOC: Beacon filter support
2349 *
2350 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
Justin P. Mattock42b2aa82011-11-28 20:31:00 -08002351 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002352 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
2353 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
2354 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
2355 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
2356 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
2357 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01002358 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
2359 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02002360 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
2361 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
2362 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
2363 *
2364 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
2365 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
2366 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
2367 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
2368 *
2369 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
2370 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
2371 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
2372 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
2373 * - a list of information element IDs
2374 * - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
2375 *
2376 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
2377 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
2378 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
2379 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
2380 * vendor information elements.
2381 *
2382 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
2383 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
2384 *
2385 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
2386 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
2387 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
2388 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
2389 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
2390 * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
2391 *
2392 *
2393 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
2394 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
2395 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
2396 * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
2397 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
2398 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
2399 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
2400 * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
2401 *
2402 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
2403 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
2404 * signal strength threshold checking.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002405 */
2406
2407/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01002408 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
2409 *
2410 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
2411 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
2412 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
2413 * "11.2.3 SM power save".
2414 *
2415 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
2416 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
2417 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
2418 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
2419 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
2420 * hardware flags.
2421 *
2422 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
2423 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
2424 * turned off otherwise.
2425 *
2426 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
2427 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
2428 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
2429 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
2430 */
2431
2432/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002433 * DOC: Frame filtering
2434 *
2435 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
2436 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
2437 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
2438 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
2439 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
2440 *
2441 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
2442 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
2443 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
2444 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002445 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
2446 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
2447 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
2448 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
2449 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
2450 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
2451 * @total_flags with the new flag states.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002452 *
2453 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
2454 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
2455 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
2456 * or dropped.
2457 *
Michael Bueschd0f5afb2008-02-12 20:12:45 +01002458 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
2459 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
2460 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
2461 * the flag, but not clear it.
2462 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
2463 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
2464 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
2465 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
2466 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
2467 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
2468 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
2469 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002470 */
2471
2472/**
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002473 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
2474 *
2475 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
2476 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
2477 * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
2478 *
2479 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
2480 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
2481 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
2482 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
2483 * the driver code.
2484 *
2485 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
2486 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
2487 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
2488 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
2489 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
2490 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
2491 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
2492 *
2493 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
2494 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
2495 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
2496 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
2497 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
2498 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
2499 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
2500 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
2501 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
2502 * @sta_notify callback.
2503 *
2504 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
2505 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
2506 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
2507 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
2508 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
2509 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
2510 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002511 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002512 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
2513 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
2514 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
2515 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
2516 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
2517 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
2518 *
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002519 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
2520 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
2521 *
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002522 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
2523 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
2524 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
2525 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
2526 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
2527 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
2528 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
2529 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
2530 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
2531 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
2532 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
2533 *
2534 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
2535 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
2536 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
2537 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
2538 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
2539 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
2540 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
2541 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
2542 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
2543 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09002544 * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002545 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
2546 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
2547 * buffers for those TIDs contain.
2548 *
2549 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
2550 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
2551 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
2552 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
2553 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002554 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002555 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
2556 *
2557 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
2558 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
2559 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
2560 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002561 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
Johannes Bergb77cf4f2014-01-09 00:00:38 +01002562 *
2563 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
2564 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
2565 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
2566 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002567 */
2568
2569/**
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002570 * DOC: HW queue control
2571 *
2572 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
2573 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
2574 * was problematic for a few reasons:
2575 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
2576 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
2577 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
2578 *
2579 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
2580 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
2581 * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
2582 *
2583 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
2584 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
2585 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
2586 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
2587 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
2588 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
2589 * the hardware queue.
2590 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
2591 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
2592 *
2593 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
2594 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
2595 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
2596 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
2597 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
2598 *
2599 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
2600 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
2601 * after-DTIM queue for AP: 8
2602 * off-channel queue: 9
2603 *
2604 * It would then set up the hardware like this:
2605 * hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
2606 *
2607 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
2608 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
2609 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
2610 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
2611 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
2612 * vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2613 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
2614 *
2615 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
2616 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
2617 *
2618 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2619 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
2620 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
2621 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
2622 */
2623
2624/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002625 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
2626 *
2627 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
2628 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
2629 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
2630 * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
2631 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002632 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
2633 * by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
2634 * multicast address.
2635 *
2636 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
2637 * %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
2638 *
2639 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
2640 * the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
2641 *
2642 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
2643 * to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
2644 * by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
2645 * mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
2646 * honour this flag if possible.
2647 *
Johannes Bergdf140462015-04-22 14:40:58 +02002648 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this
2649 * station
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002650 *
2651 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002652 *
Jakub Kicinskic2d39552015-06-02 21:10:13 +02002653 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002654 *
2655 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002656 */
2657enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002658 FIF_ALLMULTI = 1<<1,
2659 FIF_FCSFAIL = 1<<2,
2660 FIF_PLCPFAIL = 1<<3,
2661 FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4,
2662 FIF_CONTROL = 1<<5,
2663 FIF_OTHER_BSS = 1<<6,
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002664 FIF_PSPOLL = 1<<7,
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002665 FIF_PROBE_REQ = 1<<8,
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002666};
2667
2668/**
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002669 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
2670 *
2671 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
2672 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002673 *
2674 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
2675 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02002676 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002677 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
2678 *
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002679 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
2680 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
2681 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01002682 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002683 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
2684 * queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
2685 * driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
2686 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
2687 * called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
2688 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
2689 * session is gone and removes the station.
2690 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
2691 * but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
2692 * now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
2693 * should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002694 */
2695enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
2696 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
2697 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02002698 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002699 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
2700 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
2701 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01002702 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002703};
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002704
2705/**
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002706 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
2707 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002708 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
2709 * frame received on trigger-enabled AC
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002710 */
2711enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
2712 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002713 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002714};
2715
2716/**
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002717 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
2718 *
2719 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01002720 * to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
2721 * information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
2722 * flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002723 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02002724 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
2725 * changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
2726 * the peer.
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01002727 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
2728 * by the peer
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002729 */
2730enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
2731 IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED = BIT(0),
2732 IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED = BIT(1),
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02002733 IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01002734 IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED = BIT(3),
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002735};
2736
2737/**
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02002738 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
2739 *
2740 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
2741 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
2742 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vise versa).
2743 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
2744 * operations compared to other operations/flows.
2745 *
2746 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
2747 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
2748 * for sending managment frames offchannel.
2749 */
2750enum ieee80211_roc_type {
2751 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
2752 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
2753};
2754
2755/**
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02002756 * enum ieee80211_reconfig_complete_type - reconfig type
2757 *
2758 * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what
2759 * reconfiguration type was completed.
2760 *
2761 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type
2762 * (also due to resume() callback returning 1)
2763 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless
2764 * of wowlan configuration)
2765 */
2766enum ieee80211_reconfig_type {
2767 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART,
2768 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND,
2769};
2770
2771/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002772 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
2773 *
2774 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
2775 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
2776 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
2777 *
2778 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
2779 * skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
2780 * The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
Johannes Bergeefce912008-05-17 00:57:13 +02002781 * configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01002782 * preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01002783 * Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002784 *
2785 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
2786 * is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
2787 * frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
2788 * Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
2789 * or zero.
2790 * When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
2791 * to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
2792 * is added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002793 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002794 *
2795 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
2796 * is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
2797 * it must turn off frame reception.)
2798 * May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04002799 * an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
2800 * you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002801 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002802 *
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002803 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
2804 * stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
2805 * ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
2806 * configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
2807 * reconfigured at resume time.
Johannes Berg2b4562d2011-07-02 00:02:01 +02002808 * The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
2809 * wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
2810 * supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
2811 * must return 1 from this function.
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002812 *
2813 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
2814 * now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
2815 * functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
2816 * to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
2817 * will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
2818 *
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02002819 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
2820 * modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
2821 * supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
2822 * in suspend().
2823 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002824 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002825 * enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002826 * and @stop must be implemented.
2827 * The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
2828 * the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
2829 * interface is given in the conf parameter.
2830 * The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
2831 * negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002832 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002833 *
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02002834 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
2835 * is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
2836 * switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
2837 * Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
2838 * found by the interface iteration callbacks.
2839 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002840 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
2841 * The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
2842 * and no monitor interfaces are present.
2843 * When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
2844 * must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
2845 * the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
2846 * MAC address of the device going away.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002847 * Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002848 *
2849 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
2850 * function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002851 * This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002852 * if it does. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002853 *
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01002854 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
2855 * parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
2856 * level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
2857 * This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
2858 * for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002859 * of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
2860 * can sleep.
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01002861 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002862 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
2863 * This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
2864 * to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
2865 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002866 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
2867 * See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002868 * This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002869 *
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03002870 * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter.
2871 * This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames
2872 * should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination
2873 * of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates
2874 * which flags are changed.
2875 * This callback can sleep.
2876 *
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07002877 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002878 * must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002879 *
2880 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002881 * This callback is only called between add_interface and
2882 * remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01002883 * is enabled.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002884 * Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002885 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002886 *
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002887 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
2888 * This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
2889 * which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
Kalle Valoeb807fb2010-01-24 14:55:12 +02002890 * The callback must be atomic.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002891 *
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02002892 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
2893 * host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
2894 * necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
2895 * After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
2896 * userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
2897 *
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03002898 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
2899 * WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
2900 * offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
2901 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002902 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01002903 * the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
Kalle Valo9050bdd2009-03-22 21:57:21 +02002904 * configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
2905 * registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
Johannes Bergde95a542009-04-01 11:58:36 +02002906 * that power save is disabled.
2907 * The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
2908 * entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
2909 * at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
2910 * (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
2911 * When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
2912 * note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
2913 * any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002914 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002915 *
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03002916 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
2917 * The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
2918 * but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
2919 * ieee80211_scan_completed().
2920 * This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
2921 * scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
2922 * The callback can sleep.
2923 *
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03002924 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
2925 * specific intervals. The driver must call the
2926 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
2927 * This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
2928 *
2929 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
Johannes Berg37e33082014-02-17 10:48:17 +01002930 * In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called.
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03002931 *
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01002932 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
2933 * is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02002934 * The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR,
2935 * the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it
2936 * can use this parameter. The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01002937 *
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002938 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
2939 * software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
2940 * this notification.
2941 * The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01002942 *
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002943 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
2944 * Returns zero if statistics are available.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002945 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002946 *
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02002947 * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does
2948 * IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the
2949 * IV/PN for the given key from hardware.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002950 * The callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002951 *
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02002952 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
2953 * if the device does fragmentation by itself; if this callback is
2954 * implemented then the stack will not do fragmentation.
2955 * The callback can sleep.
2956 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002957 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002958 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002959 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01002960 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
2961 * AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
2962 *
2963 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01002964 * station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
2965 * returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
2966 * no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
2967 * the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
2968 * This callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01002969 *
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece2012-11-20 08:46:02 +05302970 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
2971 * when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
2972 * and @sta_remove_debugfs should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
2973 * conditional. This callback can sleep.
2974 *
2975 * @sta_remove_debugfs: Remove the debugfs files which were added using
2976 * @sta_add_debugfs. This callback can sleep.
2977 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01002978 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02002979 * associated station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
2980 * in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
2981 * %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01002982 *
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01002983 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
2984 * station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
2985 * This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
2986 * It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01002987 * up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
2988 * isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
2989 * period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
2990 * See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
2991 * The callback can sleep.
2992 *
2993 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
2994 * synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
2995 * pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
2996 * the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
2997 * in @sta_state.
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01002998 * The callback can sleep.
2999 *
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003000 * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
3001 * used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
3002 * from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
3003 * in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
3004 * uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
3005 * otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
3006 * Must be atomic.
Johannes Bergf815e2b2014-11-19 00:10:42 +01003007 * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This
3008 * is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses
3009 * the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003010 *
Johannes Berg2b9a7e12014-11-17 11:35:23 +01003011 * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon
3012 * filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so
3013 * let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of
3014 * the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not
3015 * all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible.
3016 * Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211.
3017 * The callback can sleep.
3018 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003019 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
Johannes Bergfe3fa822008-09-08 11:05:09 +02003020 * bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003021 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003022 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003023 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003024 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01003025 * this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01003026 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003027 * The callback can sleep.
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01003028 *
3029 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02003030 * Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01003031 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003032 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003033 *
3034 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
3035 * with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
3036 * function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
3037 * TSF synchronization.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003038 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003039 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003040 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
3041 * This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
3042 * used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003043 * Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003044 * The callback can sleep.
Ron Rindjunskyd3c990f2007-11-26 16:14:34 +02003045 *
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02003046 * @ampdu_action: Perform a certain A-MPDU action
3047 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
3048 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
3049 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action. Starting sequence number (@ssn)
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003050 * is the first frame we expect to perform the action on. Notice
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02003051 * that TX/RX_STOP can pass NULL for this parameter.
Sara Sharonfad47182015-12-08 16:04:34 +02003052 * The @buf_size parameter is valid only when the action is set to
3053 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL and
3054 * indicates the reorder buffer size (number of subframes) for this
3055 * session.
3056 * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver
Johannes Berg5312c3f2011-04-01 13:52:34 +02003057 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than this
3058 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
3059 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
3060 * possible with a buf_size of 8:
3061 * - TX: 1.....7
3062 * - RX: 2....7 (lost frame #1)
3063 * - TX: 8..1...
3064 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
3065 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
3066 * - TX: 1 or 18 or 81
3067 * Even "189" would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
Emmanuel Grumbache3abc8f2015-08-16 11:13:22 +03003068 * The @amsdu parameter is valid when the action is set to
3069 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL and indicates the peer's ability
3070 * to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU.
Johannes Berg5312c3f2011-04-01 13:52:34 +02003071 *
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003072 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
Johannes Berg85ad1812010-06-10 10:21:49 +02003073 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02003074 *
Randy Dunlap4e8998f2010-05-21 11:28:33 -07003075 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
3076 *
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02003077 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
3078 * need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
3079 * and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003080 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003081 *
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01003082 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
3083 * in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
Lorenzo Bianconia4bcaf52014-09-04 23:57:41 +02003084 * accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout
3085 * estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for
3086 * coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep.
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01003087 *
David Spinadel52981cd2013-07-31 18:06:22 +03003088 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
3089 * be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07003090 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berga80f7c02009-12-23 13:15:32 +01003091 *
3092 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01003093 * that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
3094 * of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
3095 * use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
3096 * If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
Emmanuel Grumbach77be2c52014-03-27 11:30:29 +02003097 * Note that vif can be NULL.
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01003098 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003099 *
3100 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
3101 * switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
3102 * callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
3103 * completion of the channel switch.
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003104 *
Bruno Randolf79b1c462010-11-24 14:34:41 +09003105 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
3106 * Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
3107 * reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
3108 * (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
3109 *
3110 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01003111 *
3112 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
3113 * call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
3114 * that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
3115 * offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
3116 * normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
3117 * duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02003118 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02003119 * Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
3120 * must be accepted in this case.
3121 * This callback may sleep.
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01003122 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
3123 * aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05003124 *
3125 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
3126 *
3127 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05303128 *
3129 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
3130 * queues before entering power save.
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05303131 *
3132 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
3133 * when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
3134 * The callback can sleep.
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +02003135 * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See
3136 * &enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types.
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +03003137 * The callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003138 *
3139 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
3140 * parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
3141 * sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
3142 * to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09003143 * Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003144 * if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
3145 * the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
3146 * the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
3147 * more-data bit must always be set.
3148 * The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
3149 * from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
Johannes Bergdeeaee12011-09-29 16:04:35 +02003150 * In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
3151 * @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
3152 * this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3153 * on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
3154 * period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
3155 * responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003156 * In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
3157 * bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
3158 * at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02003159 * setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
3160 * service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02003161 * on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01003162 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003163 * This callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003164 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
3165 * to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
3166 * via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01003167 * released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003168 * and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
3169 * frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
3170 * them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3171 * on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02003172 * bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01003173 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003174 * The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
3175 * frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
3176 * This callback must be atomic.
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07003177 *
3178 * @get_et_sset_count: Ethtool API to get string-set count.
3179 *
3180 * @get_et_stats: Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
3181 *
3182 * @get_et_strings: Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
3183 * and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
3184 *
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02003185 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
3186 * before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
3187 * bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
3188 * yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
3189 * transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
3190 * powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
3191 * management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
3192 * driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
3193 * and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
3194 * The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
3195 * mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
3196 * The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003197 *
Arik Nemtsovee10f2c2014-06-11 17:18:27 +03003198 * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending
3199 * a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's
3200 * channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS
3201 * setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP.
3202 * mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS
3203 * discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least
3204 * 2 * (DTIM period).
3205 * The callback is optional and can sleep.
3206 *
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003207 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303208 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003209 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303210 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003211 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
3212 * may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
3213 * channel context with different settings
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303214 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003215 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
3216 * to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303217 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003218 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
3219 * unbound from vif.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303220 * This callback may sleep.
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003221 * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to
3222 * another, as specified in the list of
3223 * @ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according
3224 * to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303225 * This callback may sleep.
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003226 *
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02003227 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
3228 * information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
3229 * context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
3230 * software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
3231 * just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
3232 * disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
3233 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01003234 *
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02003235 * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and
3236 * during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed.
3237 * This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and
3238 * indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames).
3239 * This callback may sleep.
Johannes Berg8f21b0a2013-01-11 00:28:01 +01003240 *
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01003241 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
3242 * Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
3243 * This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003244 *
3245 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
3246 * Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
3247 * function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003248 * decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003249 * ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
3250 * get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003251 * 1 using ieee80211_csa_is_complete() after the beacon has been
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003252 * transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003253 * If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
3254 * since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
Luciano Coelho6d027bc2014-10-08 09:48:37 +03003255 * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3256 * before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA
3257 * gets a CSA or an userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing
3258 * the driver to prepare for the channel switch.
Luciano Coelhof1d65582014-10-08 09:48:38 +03003259 * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3260 * after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the
3261 * driver to go back to a normal configuration.
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003262 *
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003263 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
3264 * information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
3265 * channel context is bound before this is called.
3266 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02003267 *
3268 * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the
3269 * specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0
3270 * if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide.
Felix Fietkau5b3dc422014-10-26 00:32:53 +02003271 *
3272 * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration
3273 * and hardware limits.
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003274 *
3275 * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver
3276 * is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations
3277 * and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The
3278 * driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of
3279 * the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation.
3280 * The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can
3281 * optionally copy the skb for further re-use.
3282 * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both
3283 * peers must be on the base channel when the call completes.
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003284 * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or
3285 * response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets
3286 * parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue
3287 * an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch
3288 * response template is provided, together with the location of the
3289 * switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within
3290 * the function call.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01003291 *
3292 * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003293 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003294struct ieee80211_ops {
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02003295 void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3296 struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
3297 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003298 int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003299 void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02003300#ifdef CONFIG_PM
3301 int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
3302 int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg6d525632012-04-04 15:05:25 +02003303 void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02003304#endif
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003305 int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003306 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02003307 int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3308 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02003309 enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003310 void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003311 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02003312 int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01003313 void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3314 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3315 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
3316 u32 changed);
Johannes Bergb2abb6e2011-07-19 10:39:53 +02003317
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02003318 int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3319 void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3320
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02003321 u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Jiri Pirko22bedad32010-04-01 21:22:57 +00003322 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003323 void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3324 unsigned int changed_flags,
3325 unsigned int *total_flags,
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02003326 u64 multicast);
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03003327 void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3328 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3329 unsigned int filter_flags,
3330 unsigned int changed_flags);
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02003331 int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3332 bool set);
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04003333 int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01003334 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04003335 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02003336 void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergb3fbdcf2010-01-21 11:40:47 +01003337 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3338 struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
3339 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3340 u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02003341 void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3342 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3343 struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03003344 void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3345 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
Johannes Berga060bbf2010-04-27 11:59:34 +02003346 int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02003347 struct ieee80211_scan_request *req);
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03003348 void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3349 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003350 int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3351 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3352 struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
David Spinadel633e2712014-02-06 16:15:23 +02003353 struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies);
Johannes Berg37e33082014-02-17 10:48:17 +01003354 int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003355 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02003356 void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3357 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3358 const u8 *mac_addr);
3359 void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3360 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003361 int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3362 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02003363 void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3364 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
3365 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02003366 int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003367 int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003368 int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3369 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3370 int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3371 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece2012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303372#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
3373 void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3374 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3375 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3376 struct dentry *dir);
3377 void (*sta_remove_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3378 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3379 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3380 struct dentry *dir);
3381#endif
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003382 void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02003383 enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01003384 int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3385 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3386 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
3387 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01003388 void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3389 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3390 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003391 void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3392 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3393 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3394 u32 changed);
Johannes Bergf815e2b2014-11-19 00:10:42 +01003395 void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3396 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3397 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Berg2b9a7e12014-11-17 11:35:23 +01003398 void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3399 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3400 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3401 struct station_info *sinfo);
Eliad Peller8a3a3c82011-10-02 10:15:52 +02003402 int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berga3304b02012-03-28 11:04:24 +02003403 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003404 const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
Eliad Peller37a41b42011-09-21 14:06:11 +03003405 u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3406 void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3407 u64 tsf);
3408 void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003409 int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02003410 int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01003411 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02003412 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action,
Johannes Berg0b01f032011-01-18 13:51:05 +01003413 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid, u16 *ssn,
Emmanuel Grumbache3abc8f2015-08-16 11:13:22 +03003414 u8 buf_size, bool amsdu);
Holger Schurig12897232010-04-19 10:23:57 +02003415 int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
3416 struct survey_info *survey);
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02003417 void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Lorenzo Bianconia4bcaf52014-09-04 23:57:41 +02003418 void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003419#ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
David Spinadel52981cd2013-07-31 18:06:22 +03003420 int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3421 void *data, int len);
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07003422 int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
3423 struct netlink_callback *cb,
3424 void *data, int len);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003425#endif
Emmanuel Grumbach77be2c52014-03-27 11:30:29 +02003426 void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3427 u32 queues, bool drop);
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003428 void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Luciano Coelho0f791eb42014-10-08 09:48:40 +03003429 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003430 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
Bruno Randolf15d96752010-11-10 12:50:56 +09003431 int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
3432 int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003433
3434 int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Eliad Peller49884562012-11-19 17:05:09 +02003435 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003436 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02003437 int duration,
3438 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003439 int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05003440 int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
3441 void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3442 u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05303443 bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05303444 int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3445 const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +02003446 void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3447 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3448 const struct ieee80211_event *event);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003449
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003450 void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3451 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3452 u16 tids, int num_frames,
3453 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3454 bool more_data);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003455 void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3456 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3457 u16 tids, int num_frames,
3458 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3459 bool more_data);
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07003460
3461 int (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3462 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
3463 void (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3464 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3465 struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
3466 void (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3467 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3468 u32 sset, u8 *data);
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02003469
3470 void (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3471 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003472
Arik Nemtsovee10f2c2014-06-11 17:18:27 +03003473 void (*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3474 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3475
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003476 int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3477 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3478 void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3479 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3480 void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3481 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
3482 u32 changed);
3483 int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3484 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3485 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3486 void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3487 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3488 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003489 int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3490 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs,
3491 int n_vifs,
3492 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode);
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01003493
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02003494 void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3495 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type);
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01003496
3497#if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
3498 void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3499 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3500 struct inet6_dev *idev);
3501#endif
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003502 void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3503 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3504 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
Luciano Coelho6d027bc2014-10-08 09:48:37 +03003505 int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3506 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3507 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003508
Luciano Coelhof1d65582014-10-08 09:48:38 +03003509 int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3510 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3511
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003512 int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3513 void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02003514 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Felix Fietkau5b3dc422014-10-26 00:32:53 +02003515 int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3516 int *dbm);
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003517
3518 int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3519 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3520 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class,
3521 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003522 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie);
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003523 void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3524 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3525 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003526 void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3527 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3528 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params);
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01003529
3530 void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3531 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003532};
3533
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003534/**
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003535 * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device
3536 *
3537 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
3538 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
3539 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
3540 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
3541 * @priv_data_len.
3542 *
3543 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
3544 * @ops: callbacks for this device
3545 * @requested_name: Requested name for this device.
3546 * NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d)
3547 *
3548 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
3549 */
3550struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len,
3551 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops,
3552 const char *requested_name);
3553
3554/**
3555 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003556 *
3557 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
3558 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
3559 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
3560 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
3561 * @priv_data_len.
3562 *
3563 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
3564 * @ops: callbacks for this device
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003565 *
3566 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003567 */
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003568static inline
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003569struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003570 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops)
3571{
3572 return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL);
3573}
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003574
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003575/**
3576 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
3577 *
Johannes Bergdbbea672008-02-26 14:34:06 +01003578 * You must call this function before any other functions in
3579 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
3580 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003581 *
3582 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003583 *
3584 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003585 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003586int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3587
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003588/**
3589 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
3590 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
3591 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
3592 * (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
3593 */
3594struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
3595 int throughput;
3596 int blink_time;
3597};
3598
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003599/**
3600 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
3601 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
3602 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
3603 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
3604 * interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
3605 */
3606enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
3607 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO = BIT(0),
3608 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK = BIT(1),
3609 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED = BIT(2),
3610};
3611
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003612#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003613const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3614const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3615const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3616const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3617const char *
3618__ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3619 unsigned int flags,
3620 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
3621 unsigned int blink_table_len);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003622#endif
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003623/**
3624 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
3625 *
3626 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3627 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3628 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3629 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3630 *
3631 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003632 *
3633 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003634 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003635static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003636{
3637#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3638 return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
3639#else
3640 return NULL;
3641#endif
3642}
3643
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003644/**
3645 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
3646 *
3647 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3648 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3649 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3650 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3651 *
3652 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003653 *
3654 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003655 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003656static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003657{
3658#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3659 return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
3660#else
3661 return NULL;
3662#endif
3663}
3664
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003665/**
3666 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
3667 *
3668 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3669 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3670 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3671 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3672 *
3673 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003674 *
3675 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003676 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003677static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02003678{
3679#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3680 return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
3681#else
3682 return NULL;
3683#endif
3684}
3685
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003686/**
3687 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
3688 *
3689 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3690 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3691 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3692 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3693 *
3694 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003695 *
3696 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003697 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003698static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003699{
3700#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3701 return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
3702#else
3703 return NULL;
3704#endif
3705}
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02003706
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003707/**
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003708 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
3709 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003710 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003711 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
3712 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
3713 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003714 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
3715 * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
3716 *
3717 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003718 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003719static inline const char *
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003720ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003721 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
3722 unsigned int blink_table_len)
3723{
3724#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003725 return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003726 blink_table_len);
3727#else
3728 return NULL;
3729#endif
3730}
3731
3732/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003733 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
3734 *
3735 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
3736 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
3737 *
3738 * @hw: the hardware to unregister
3739 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003740void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3741
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003742/**
3743 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
3744 *
3745 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
3746 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07003747 * before calling this function.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003748 *
3749 * @hw: the hardware to free
3750 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003751void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3752
Johannes Bergf2753dd2009-04-14 10:09:24 +02003753/**
3754 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
3755 *
3756 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
3757 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
3758 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
3759 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
3760 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
3761 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
3762 *
3763 * @hw: the hardware to restart
3764 */
3765void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3766
Johannes Berg06d181a2014-02-04 20:51:09 +01003767/**
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02003768 * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003769 *
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02003770 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
3771 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
3772 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
3773 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
3774 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
3775 *
3776 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
3777 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
3778 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
3779 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3780 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
3781 *
3782 * This function must be called with BHs disabled.
3783 *
3784 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3785 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
3786 * @napi: the NAPI context
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003787 */
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02003788void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
3789 struct napi_struct *napi);
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003790
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003791/**
3792 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
3793 *
3794 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
Zhu Yie3cf8b32010-03-29 17:35:07 +08003795 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
3796 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
3797 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
3798 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003799 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003800 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003801 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
3802 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003803 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3804 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003805 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003806 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Bergd20ef632009-10-11 15:10:40 +02003807 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003808 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3809 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003810 */
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02003811static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb)
3812{
3813 ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, skb, NULL);
3814}
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003815
3816/**
3817 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
3818 *
3819 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003820 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
3821 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003822 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003823 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
3824 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003825 *
3826 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3827 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003828 */
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +02003829void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003830
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003831/**
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003832 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
3833 *
3834 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
3835 * (internally disables bottom halves).
3836 *
3837 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003838 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3839 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003840 *
3841 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3842 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
3843 */
3844static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3845 struct sk_buff *skb)
3846{
3847 local_bh_disable();
3848 ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
3849 local_bh_enable();
3850}
3851
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003852/**
3853 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
3854 *
3855 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
3856 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
3857 * entering/leaving PS mode.
3858 *
3859 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
3860 *
3861 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
3862 * each other.
3863 *
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003864 * @sta: currently connected sta
3865 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003866 *
3867 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003868 */
3869int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
3870
3871/**
3872 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
3873 * (in process context)
3874 *
3875 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
3876 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
3877 * applies.
3878 *
3879 * @sta: currently connected sta
3880 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003881 *
3882 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003883 */
3884static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3885 bool start)
3886{
3887 int ret;
3888
3889 local_bh_disable();
3890 ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
3891 local_bh_enable();
3892
3893 return ret;
3894}
3895
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01003896/*
3897 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
3898 * This is enough for the radiotap header.
3899 */
Helmut Schaa7f2a5e22011-10-11 18:08:55 +02003900#define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM 14
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01003901
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003902/**
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003903 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
Randy Dunlapbdfbe802011-05-22 17:22:45 -07003904 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003905 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
3906 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003907 *
3908 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003909 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
3910 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003911 *
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003912 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
3913 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
3914 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
3915 * call! Beware of the locking!)
3916 *
3917 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
3918 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
3919 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
3920 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
3921 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
3922 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
3923 *
3924 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
3925 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
3926 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
3927 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
3928 * use this API.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003929 */
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003930void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3931 u8 tid, bool buffered);
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003932
3933/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02003934 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
3935 *
3936 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
3937 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
3938 * rate selection table for the station entry.
3939 *
3940 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3941 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
3942 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
3943 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
3944 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
3945 */
3946void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3947 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3948 struct sk_buff *skb,
3949 struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
3950 int max_rates);
3951
3952/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003953 * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
3954 *
3955 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
3956 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
3957 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
3958 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003959 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
3960 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01003961 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003962 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3963 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003964 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003965 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3966 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003967 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003968void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003969 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003970
3971/**
Felix Fietkauf027c2a2014-11-19 20:08:13 +01003972 * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb
3973 *
3974 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
3975 * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to
3976 * specific skbs.
3977 *
3978 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
3979 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
3980 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
3981 *
3982 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3983 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent
3984 * (NULL for multicast packets)
3985 * @info: tx status information
3986 */
3987void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3988 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3989 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
3990
3991/**
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01003992 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
3993 *
3994 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
3995 *
3996 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
3997 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
3998 * for a single hardware.
3999 *
4000 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4001 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4002 */
4003static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4004 struct sk_buff *skb)
4005{
4006 local_bh_disable();
4007 ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
4008 local_bh_enable();
4009}
4010
4011/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07004012 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004013 *
4014 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
4015 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4016 *
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01004017 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4018 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004019 *
4020 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4021 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004022 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004023void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004024 struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004025
4026/**
Arik Nemtsov8178d382011-04-18 14:22:28 +03004027 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
4028 *
4029 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
4030 * connected STA.
4031 *
4032 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
4033 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
4034 */
4035void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
4036
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004037#define IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM 2
4038
Arik Nemtsov8178d382011-04-18 14:22:28 +03004039/**
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004040 * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets
4041 * @tim_offset: position of TIM element
4042 * @tim_length: size of TIM element
Luciano Coelho8d77ec82014-05-15 20:32:08 +03004043 * @csa_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM offsets
4044 * to CSA counters. This array can contain zero values which
4045 * should be ignored.
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004046 */
4047struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets {
4048 u16 tim_offset;
4049 u16 tim_length;
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004050
4051 u16 csa_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM];
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004052};
4053
4054/**
4055 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function
4056 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4057 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4058 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
4059 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
4060 *
4061 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4062 * obtain the beacon template.
4063 *
4064 * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the
4065 * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004066 * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when
4067 * applicable, the CSA count.
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004068 *
4069 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4070 *
4071 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4072 */
4073struct sk_buff *
4074ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4075 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4076 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs);
4077
4078/**
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004079 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
4080 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004081 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004082 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
4083 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4084 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
4085 * (including the ID and length bytes!).
4086 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4087 *
4088 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004089 * obtain the beacon frame.
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004090 *
4091 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4092 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004093 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly
4094 * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004095 *
4096 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004097 *
4098 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004099 */
4100struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4101 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4102 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length);
4103
4104/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004105 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
4106 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004107 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004108 *
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004109 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004110 *
4111 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004112 */
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004113static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4114 struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
4115{
4116 return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL);
4117}
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004118
4119/**
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004120 * ieee80211_csa_update_counter - request mac80211 to decrement the csa counter
4121 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4122 *
4123 * The csa counter should be updated after each beacon transmission.
4124 * This function is called implicitly when
4125 * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the
4126 * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this
4127 * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's csa counters.
4128 *
4129 * Return: new csa counter value
4130 */
4131u8 ieee80211_csa_update_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4132
4133/**
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02004134 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
4135 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4136 *
4137 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02004138 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02004139 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
4140 */
4141void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4142
4143/**
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02004144 * ieee80211_csa_is_complete - find out if counters reached 1
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02004145 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4146 *
4147 * This function returns whether the channel switch counters reached zero.
4148 */
4149bool ieee80211_csa_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4150
4151
4152/**
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02004153 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
4154 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4155 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4156 *
4157 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4158 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
4159 *
4160 * Can only be called in AP mode.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004161 *
4162 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02004163 */
4164struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4165 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4166
4167/**
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004168 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
4169 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4170 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4171 *
4172 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
4173 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4174 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
4175 *
4176 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4177 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004178 *
4179 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004180 */
4181struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4182 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4183
4184/**
4185 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
4186 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4187 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4188 *
4189 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
4190 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4191 * BSSID and address is used.
4192 *
4193 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4194 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004195 *
4196 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004197 */
4198struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4199 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4200
4201/**
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004202 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
4203 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02004204 * @src_addr: source MAC address
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004205 * @ssid: SSID buffer
4206 * @ssid_len: length of SSID
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01004207 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004208 *
4209 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4210 * hardware.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004211 *
4212 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004213 */
4214struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02004215 const u8 *src_addr,
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004216 const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01004217 size_t tailroom);
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004218
4219/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004220 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
4221 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004222 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004223 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
4224 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004225 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004226 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
4227 *
4228 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4229 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4230 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4231 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
4232 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004233void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004234 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004235 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004236 struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
4237
4238/**
4239 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
4240 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004241 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004242 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004243 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004244 *
4245 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4246 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4247 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004248 *
4249 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004250 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004251__le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4252 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004253 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004254
4255/**
4256 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
4257 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004258 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004259 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
4260 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004261 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004262 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
4263 *
4264 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4265 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4266 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4267 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
4268 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004269void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4270 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004271 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004272 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004273 struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
4274
4275/**
4276 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
4277 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004278 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004279 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004280 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004281 *
4282 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4283 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4284 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004285 *
4286 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004287 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004288__le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4289 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004290 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004291 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004292
4293/**
4294 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
4295 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004296 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02004297 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004298 * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01004299 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004300 *
4301 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
4302 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004303 *
4304 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004305 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004306__le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4307 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Michal Kazior4ee73f32012-04-11 08:47:56 +02004308 enum ieee80211_band band,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004309 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01004310 struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004311
4312/**
4313 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
4314 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004315 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004316 *
4317 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
4318 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
4319 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
4320 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004321 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
4322 *
4323 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
4324 * frames are available.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004325 *
4326 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
4327 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
4328 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
4329 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
4330 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
4331 * use common code for all beacons.
4332 */
4333struct sk_buff *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004334ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004335
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004336/**
Johannes Berg42d98792011-07-07 18:58:01 +02004337 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
4338 *
4339 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
4340 *
4341 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4342 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4343 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4344 */
4345void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4346 u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
4347
4348/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004349 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004350 *
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004351 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
4352 * from the given packet.
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004353 *
4354 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004355 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
4356 * with this P1K
4357 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004358 */
Johannes Berg42d98792011-07-07 18:58:01 +02004359static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4360 struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
4361{
4362 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
4363 const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
4364 u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
4365
4366 ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
4367}
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004368
4369/**
Johannes Berg8bca5d82011-07-13 19:50:34 +02004370 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
4371 *
4372 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
4373 * and transmitter address.
4374 *
4375 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4376 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
4377 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4378 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4379 */
4380void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4381 const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
4382
4383/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004384 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
4385 *
4386 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
4387 * in the packet.
4388 *
4389 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4390 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
4391 * encrypted with this key
4392 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
4393 */
4394void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4395 struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02004396
4397/**
Johannes Berg3ea542d2011-07-07 18:58:00 +02004398 * ieee80211_get_key_tx_seq - get key TX sequence counter
4399 *
4400 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4401 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
4402 *
4403 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current TX IV/PN
4404 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV generation is
4405 * offloaded to the device.
4406 *
4407 * Note that this function may only be called when no TX processing
4408 * can be done concurrently, for example when queues are stopped
4409 * and the stop has been synchronized.
4410 */
4411void ieee80211_get_key_tx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4412 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4413
4414/**
4415 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
4416 *
4417 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02004418 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
Johannes Berg3ea542d2011-07-07 18:58:00 +02004419 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
4420 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
4421 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
4422 *
4423 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
4424 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
4425 * by the device and not by mac80211.
4426 *
4427 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
4428 * can be done concurrently.
4429 */
4430void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4431 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4432
4433/**
Johannes Berg27b3eb92013-08-07 20:11:55 +02004434 * ieee80211_set_key_tx_seq - set key TX sequence counter
4435 *
4436 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4437 * @seq: new sequence data
4438 *
4439 * This function allows a driver to set the current TX IV/PNs for the
4440 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and the
4441 * device may have transmitted frames using the PTK, e.g. replies to
4442 * ARP requests.
4443 *
4444 * Note that this function may only be called when no TX processing
4445 * can be done concurrently.
4446 */
4447void ieee80211_set_key_tx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4448 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4449
4450/**
4451 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
4452 *
4453 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02004454 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
Johannes Berg27b3eb92013-08-07 20:11:55 +02004455 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
4456 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
4457 * @seq: new sequence data
4458 *
4459 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
4460 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
4461 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
4462 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
4463 *
4464 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
4465 * can be done concurrently.
4466 */
4467void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4468 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4469
4470/**
4471 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
4472 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4473 *
4474 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
4475 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
4476 * instead assumed to have been removed already.
4477 *
4478 * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
4479 * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
4480 */
4481void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
4482
4483/**
4484 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
4485 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
4486 * @keyconf: new key data
4487 *
4488 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
4489 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
4490 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
4491 *
4492 * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
4493 * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
4494 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
4495 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
4496 *
4497 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
4498 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
4499 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
4500 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
4501 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
4502 * of the reconfiguration.
4503 *
4504 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
4505 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
4506 *
4507 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
4508 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
4509 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
4510 * the key that's being replaced.
4511 */
4512struct ieee80211_key_conf *
4513ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4514 struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
4515
4516/**
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02004517 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
4518 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
4519 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
4520 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
4521 * @gfp: allocation flags
4522 */
4523void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
4524 const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
4525
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004526/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004527 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
4528 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4529 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4530 *
4531 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
4532 */
4533void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4534
4535/**
4536 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
4537 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4538 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4539 *
4540 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
4541 */
4542void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4543
4544/**
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03004545 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
4546 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4547 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4548 *
4549 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004550 *
4551 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03004552 */
4553
4554int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4555
4556/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004557 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
4558 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4559 *
4560 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
4561 */
4562void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4563
4564/**
4565 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
4566 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4567 *
4568 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
4569 */
4570void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4571
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004572/**
4573 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
4574 *
4575 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
4576 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
Johannes Berg8789d452010-08-26 13:30:26 +02004577 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
4578 * any context, including hardirq context.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004579 *
4580 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
Johannes Berg2a519312009-02-10 21:25:55 +01004581 * @aborted: set to true if scan was aborted
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004582 */
Johannes Berg2a519312009-02-10 21:25:55 +01004583void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool aborted);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004584
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004585/**
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03004586 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
4587 *
4588 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
4589 * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
4590 *
4591 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
4592 */
4593void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4594
4595/**
4596 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
4597 *
4598 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
4599 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
4600 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
4601 * while associating, for instance.
4602 *
4603 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
4604 */
4605void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4606
4607/**
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004608 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
4609 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
4610 * been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
4611 * reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
4612 * interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
4613 * haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
4614 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
4615 * interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004616 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up).
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004617 */
4618enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
4619 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL = 0,
4620 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0),
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004621 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE = BIT(1),
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004622};
4623
4624/**
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004625 * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces
4626 *
4627 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4628 * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as
4629 * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep.
4630 * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
4631 *
4632 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4633 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
4634 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
4635 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4636 */
4637void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
4638 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
4639 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4640 void *data);
4641
4642/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07004643 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004644 *
4645 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4646 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004647 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
4648 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
4649 * be used.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004650 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004651 *
4652 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004653 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004654 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004655 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4656 */
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004657static inline void
4658ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
4659 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
4660 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4661 void *data)
4662{
4663 ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw,
4664 iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE,
4665 iterator, data);
4666}
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004667
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004668/**
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004669 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
4670 *
4671 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4672 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
4673 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
4674 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004675 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004676 *
4677 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004678 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004679 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4680 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4681 */
4682void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004683 u32 iter_flags,
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004684 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4685 u8 *mac,
4686 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4687 void *data);
4688
4689/**
Johannes Bergc7c71062013-08-21 22:07:20 +02004690 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl - iterate active interfaces
4691 *
4692 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4693 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
4694 * This version can only be used while holding the RTNL.
4695 *
4696 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4697 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
4698 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4699 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4700 */
4701void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4702 u32 iter_flags,
4703 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4704 u8 *mac,
4705 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4706 void *data);
4707
4708/**
Arik Nemtsov0fc1e042014-10-22 12:30:59 +03004709 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations
4710 *
4711 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
4712 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
4713 * function for them.
4714 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
4715 *
4716 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4717 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4718 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4719 */
4720void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4721 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4722 struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
4723 void *data);
4724/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04004725 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
4726 *
4727 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
4728 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
4729 *
4730 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
4731 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
4732 */
4733void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
4734
4735/**
4736 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
4737 *
4738 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
4739 * workqueue.
4740 *
4741 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
4742 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
4743 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
4744 */
4745void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4746 struct delayed_work *dwork,
4747 unsigned long delay);
4748
4749/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004750 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004751 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004752 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05304753 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07004754 *
4755 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004756 *
4757 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
4758 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
4759 * will be managed by the mac80211.
4760 */
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05304761int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
4762 u16 timeout);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004763
4764/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004765 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004766 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004767 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
4768 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
4769 *
4770 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02004771 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
4772 * from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004773 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004774void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004775 u16 tid);
4776
4777/**
4778 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004779 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004780 * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07004781 *
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02004782 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004783 *
4784 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
4785 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
4786 * will be managed by the mac80211.
4787 */
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02004788int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004789
4790/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004791 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004792 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004793 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
4794 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
4795 *
4796 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02004797 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
4798 * can be called from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004799 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004800void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004801 u16 tid);
4802
Mohamed Abbas84363e62008-04-04 16:59:58 -07004803/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004804 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
4805 *
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004806 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004807 * @addr: station's address
4808 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004809 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
4810 *
4811 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004812 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
4813 */
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004814struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004815 const u8 *addr);
4816
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004817/**
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004818 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004819 *
4820 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004821 * @addr: remote station's address
4822 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004823 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004824 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
4825 *
4826 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004827 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
4828 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004829 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
4830 * the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
4831 * We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
4832 * logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
4833 * BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
4834 * In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
4835 * is not reliable.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004836 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004837 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004838 */
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004839struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4840 const u8 *addr,
4841 const u8 *localaddr);
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004842
4843/**
Johannes Bergaf818582009-11-06 11:35:50 +01004844 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
4845 * @hw: the hardware
4846 * @pubsta: the station
4847 * @block: whether to block or unblock
4848 *
4849 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
4850 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
4851 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
4852 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
4853 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
4854 *
4855 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
4856 * manner.
4857 *
4858 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
4859 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
4860 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
4861 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
4862 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
4863 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
4864 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
4865 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
4866 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
4867 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
4868 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
4869 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
4870 * woke up while blocked or not.
4871 */
4872void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4873 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
4874
4875/**
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02004876 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
4877 * @pubsta: the station
4878 *
4879 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
4880 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
4881 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
4882 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
4883 *
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01004884 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
4885 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
4886 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
4887 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
4888 *
4889 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
4890 * driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
4891 * you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
4892 * and restore the _irqsafe version!
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02004893 */
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01004894void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02004895
4896/**
Emmanuel Grumbach0ead2512015-11-17 10:24:36 +02004897 * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP
4898 * @pubsta: the station
4899 * @tid: the tid of the NDP
4900 *
4901 * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close
4902 * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when
4903 * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window.
4904 * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a
4905 * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the
4906 * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to
4907 * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any
4908 * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong.
4909 * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame
4910 * will be sent despite the station being in power-save.
4911 * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames().
4912 * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver
4913 * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call
4914 * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent.
4915 */
4916void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid);
4917
4918/**
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02004919 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
4920 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4921 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
4922 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
4923 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
4924 *
4925 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
4926 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
4927 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
4928 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
4929 * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
4930 * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
Johannes Bergf850e002011-07-13 19:50:53 +02004931 *
4932 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
4933 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
4934 * set_key callback.
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02004935 */
4936void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4937 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4938 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4939 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4940 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4941 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
4942 void *data),
4943 void *iter_data);
4944
4945/**
Eliad Pelleref044762015-11-17 10:24:37 +02004946 * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device
4947 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4948 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
4949 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
4950 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
4951 *
4952 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
4953 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
4954 * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station
4955 * in removal process will be skipped.
4956 *
4957 * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section,
4958 * and thus iter must be atomic.
4959 */
4960void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4961 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4962 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4963 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4964 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4965 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
4966 void *data),
4967 void *iter_data);
4968
4969/**
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02004970 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
4971 * @hw: pointre obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4972 * @iter: iterator function
4973 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
4974 *
4975 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
4976 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
4977 * places while calling into the driver.
4978 *
4979 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
4980 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
4981 * removed.
Johannes Berg8a61af62012-12-13 17:42:30 +01004982 *
4983 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
4984 * before the restart are considered already present so will be
4985 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
4986 * or not.
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02004987 */
4988void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
4989 struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4990 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4991 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
4992 void *data),
4993 void *iter_data);
4994
4995/**
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02004996 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
4997 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4998 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4999 *
5000 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5001 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
5002 * information. This function must only be called from within the
5003 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
5004 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005005 * %NULL.
5006 *
5007 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02005008 */
5009struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5010 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5011
5012/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02005013 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
5014 *
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01005015 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02005016 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01005017 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02005018 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02005019 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
5020 */
5021void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005022
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02005023/**
5024 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
5025 *
5026 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5027 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01005028 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02005029 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
5030 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
Johannes Berg682bd382013-01-29 13:13:50 +01005031 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
5032 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02005033 *
5034 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
5035 * without connection recovery attempts.
5036 */
5037void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5038
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005039/**
Johannes Berg95acac62011-07-12 12:30:59 +02005040 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
5041 *
5042 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5043 *
5044 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
5045 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
5046 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
5047 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
5048 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
5049 *
5050 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
5051 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
5052 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
5053 * disconnect normally later.
5054 *
5055 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
5056 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
5057 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
5058 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
5059 */
5060void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5061
5062/**
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005063 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
5064 * rssi threshold triggered
5065 *
5066 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5067 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
5068 * @gfp: context flags
5069 *
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01005070 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005071 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
5072 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
5073 */
5074void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5075 enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
5076 gfp_t gfp);
5077
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02005078/**
Johannes Berg98f03342014-11-26 12:42:02 +01005079 * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss
5080 *
5081 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5082 * @gfp: context flags
5083 */
5084void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp);
5085
5086/**
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01005087 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
5088 *
5089 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5090 */
5091void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5092
5093/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02005094 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
5095 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5096 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
5097 *
5098 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
5099 * and wake up the suspended queues.
5100 */
5101void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
5102
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02005103/**
5104 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
5105 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Berg633dd1e2010-08-18 15:01:23 +02005106 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02005107 *
5108 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
5109 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
5110 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
5111 */
5112void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5113 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
5114
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02005115/**
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01005116 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
5117 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5118 */
5119void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5120
5121/**
5122 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
5123 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5124 */
5125void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5126
Shahar Levif41ccd72011-05-22 16:10:21 +03005127/**
5128 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
5129 *
5130 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
5131 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
5132 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
5133 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
5134 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
5135 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
5136 *
5137 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5138 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
5139 * @addr: & to bssid mac address
5140 */
5141void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
5142 const u8 *addr);
5143
Felix Fietkau8c771242011-08-20 15:53:55 +02005144/**
5145 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
5146 *
5147 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
5148 * buffer.
5149 *
5150 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5151 * @ra: the peer's destination address
5152 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
5153 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
5154 */
5155void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
5156
Michal Kazior08cf42e2014-07-16 12:12:15 +02005157/**
5158 * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session
5159 *
5160 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5161 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5162 * reordering.
5163 *
5164 * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5165 * when they complete AddBa negotiation.
5166 *
5167 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5168 * @addr: station mac address
5169 * @tid: the rx tid
5170 */
5171void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5172 const u8 *addr, u16 tid);
5173
5174/**
5175 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session
5176 *
5177 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5178 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5179 * reordering.
5180 *
5181 * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5182 * when they complete DelBa negotiation.
5183 *
5184 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5185 * @addr: station mac address
5186 * @tid: the rx tid
5187 */
5188void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5189 const u8 *addr, u16 tid);
5190
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005191/* Rate control API */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005192
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005193/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005194 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005195 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005196 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
5197 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
5198 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01005199 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
5200 * to be filled in
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005201 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
5202 * which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
5203 * used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
5204 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
5205 * RTS threshold
5206 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
5207 * if the selected rate supports it
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01005208 * @max_rate_idx: user-requested maximum (legacy) rate
Jouni Malinen37eb0b12010-01-06 13:09:08 +02005209 * (deprecated; this will be removed once drivers get updated to use
5210 * rate_idx_mask)
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01005211 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02005212 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01005213 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005214 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005215struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
5216 struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
5217 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
5218 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
5219 struct sk_buff *skb;
5220 struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
5221 bool rts, short_preamble;
5222 u8 max_rate_idx;
Jouni Malinen37eb0b12010-01-06 13:09:08 +02005223 u32 rate_idx_mask;
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02005224 u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01005225 bool bss;
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005226};
5227
5228struct rate_control_ops {
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005229 const char *name;
5230 void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct dentry *debugfsdir);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005231 void (*free)(void *priv);
5232
5233 void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
5234 void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02005235 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005236 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
Sujith81cb7622009-02-12 11:38:37 +05305237 void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02005238 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg64f68e52012-03-28 10:58:37 +02005239 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5240 u32 changed);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005241 void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5242 void *priv_sta);
5243
Felix Fietkauf6845652014-11-19 20:08:08 +01005244 void (*tx_status_noskb)(void *priv,
5245 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5246 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5247 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005248 void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5249 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5250 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005251 void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5252 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005253
5254 void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
5255 struct dentry *dir);
5256 void (*remove_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta);
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02005257
5258 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005259};
5260
5261static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5262 enum ieee80211_band band,
5263 int index)
5264{
5265 return (sta == NULL || sta->supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
5266}
5267
Luis R. Rodriguez4c6d4f52009-07-16 10:05:41 -07005268/**
5269 * rate_control_send_low - helper for drivers for management/no-ack frames
5270 *
5271 * Rate control algorithms that agree to use the lowest rate to
5272 * send management frames and NO_ACK data with the respective hw
5273 * retries should use this in the beginning of their mac80211 get_rate
5274 * callback. If true is returned the rate control can simply return.
5275 * If false is returned we guarantee that sta and sta and priv_sta is
5276 * not null.
5277 *
5278 * Rate control algorithms wishing to do more intelligent selection of
5279 * rate for multicast/broadcast frames may choose to not use this.
5280 *
5281 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination. Note
5282 * that this may be null.
5283 * @priv_sta: private rate control structure. This may be null.
5284 * @txrc: rate control information we sholud populate for mac80211.
5285 */
5286bool rate_control_send_low(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5287 void *priv_sta,
5288 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
5289
5290
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005291static inline s8
5292rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5293 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
5294{
5295 int i;
5296
5297 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
5298 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
5299 return i;
5300
5301 /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01005302 WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005303
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01005304 /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005305 return 0;
5306}
5307
Luis R. Rodriguezb770b432009-07-16 10:15:09 -07005308static inline
5309bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5310 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
5311{
5312 unsigned int i;
5313
5314 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
5315 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
5316 return true;
5317 return false;
5318}
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005319
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02005320/**
5321 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
5322 *
5323 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
5324 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
5325 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
5326 * the most recent rate control module decision.
5327 *
5328 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5329 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
5330 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
5331 */
5332int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5333 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
5334 struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
5335
Johannes Berg631ad702014-01-20 23:29:34 +01005336int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
5337void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005338
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005339static inline bool
5340conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5341{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005342 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005343}
5344
5345static inline bool
5346conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5347{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005348 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
5349 conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005350}
5351
5352static inline bool
5353conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5354{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005355 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
5356 conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005357}
5358
5359static inline bool
5360conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5361{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005362 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005363}
5364
5365static inline bool
5366conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5367{
Rostislav Lisovy041f6072014-04-02 15:31:55 +02005368 return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) &&
5369 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) &&
5370 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT);
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005371}
5372
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02005373static inline enum nl80211_iftype
5374ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
5375{
5376 if (p2p) {
5377 switch (type) {
5378 case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
5379 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
5380 case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
5381 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
5382 default:
5383 break;
5384 }
5385 }
5386 return type;
5387}
5388
5389static inline enum nl80211_iftype
5390ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
5391{
5392 return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
5393}
5394
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -07005395void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5396 int rssi_min_thold,
5397 int rssi_max_thold);
5398
5399void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Arik Nemtsov768db342011-09-28 14:12:51 +03005400
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005401/**
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005402 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005403 *
5404 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
5405 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005406 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
5407 *
5408 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
5409 * applicable.
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005410 */
Wey-Yi Guy1dae27f2012-04-13 12:02:57 -07005411int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5412
Johannes Bergcd8f7cb2013-01-22 12:34:29 +01005413/**
5414 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
5415 * @vif: virtual interface
5416 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
5417 * @gfp: allocation flags
5418 *
5419 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
5420 */
5421void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5422 struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
5423 gfp_t gfp);
5424
Felix Fietkau06be6b12013-10-14 18:01:00 +02005425/**
5426 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
5427 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5428 * @vif: virtual interface
5429 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
5430 * @band: the band to transmit on
5431 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
5432 *
5433 * Note: must be called under RCU lock
5434 */
5435bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5436 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
5437 int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
5438
Felix Fietkaua7022e62013-12-16 21:49:14 +01005439/**
5440 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
5441 *
5442 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
5443 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
5444 *
5445 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
5446 *
5447 * private:
5448 *
5449 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
5450 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
5451 */
5452struct ieee80211_noa_data {
5453 u32 next_tsf;
5454 bool has_next_tsf;
5455
5456 u8 absent;
5457
5458 u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
5459 struct {
5460 u32 start;
5461 u32 duration;
5462 u32 interval;
5463 } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
5464};
5465
5466/**
5467 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
5468 *
5469 * @attr: P2P NoA IE
5470 * @data: NoA tracking data
5471 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
5472 *
5473 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
5474 */
5475int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
5476 struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
5477
5478/**
5479 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
5480 *
5481 * @data: NoA tracking data
5482 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
5483 */
5484void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
5485
Arik Nemtsovc887f0d32014-06-11 17:18:25 +03005486/**
5487 * ieee80211_tdls_oper - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation
5488 * @vif: virtual interface
5489 * @peer: the peer's destination address
5490 * @oper: the requested TDLS operation
5491 * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown
5492 * @gfp: allocation flags
5493 *
5494 * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request().
5495 */
5496void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer,
5497 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper,
5498 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp);
Andrei Otcheretianskia7f3a762014-10-22 15:22:49 +03005499
5500/**
Liad Kaufmanb6da9112014-11-19 13:47:38 +02005501 * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID
5502 *
5503 * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from
5504 * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such
5505 * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID,
5506 * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks
5507 * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be
5508 * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC.
5509 *
5510 * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it
5511 * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should
5512 * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback.
5513 *
5514 * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for
5515 * @tid: the TID to reserve
5516 *
5517 * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure
5518 */
5519int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
5520
5521/**
5522 * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID
5523 *
5524 * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function
5525 * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for
5526 * preventing use of this TID in the driver.
5527 *
5528 * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called
5529 * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called
5530 * from the driver's @sta_state callback.
5531 *
5532 * @sta: the station
5533 * @tid: the TID to unreserve
5534 */
5535void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
5536
5537/**
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01005538 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
5539 *
5540 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5541 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
5542 *
5543 * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available.
5544 */
5545struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5546 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07005547#endif /* MAC80211_H */